diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 2117039 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/23991-h.htm | 3905 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-005.jpg | bin | 0 -> 39059 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-006.jpg | bin | 0 -> 43840 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-011.jpg | bin | 0 -> 13105 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-012.jpg | bin | 0 -> 37425 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-015.jpg | bin | 0 -> 36058 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-016.jpg | bin | 0 -> 31206 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-019.jpg | bin | 0 -> 23658 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-020.jpg | bin | 0 -> 31503 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-022.jpg | bin | 0 -> 22375 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-023.jpg | bin | 0 -> 33514 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-024.jpg | bin | 0 -> 26589 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-025.jpg | bin | 0 -> 17523 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-026.jpg | bin | 0 -> 24016 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-027.jpg | bin | 0 -> 34620 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-028.jpg | bin | 0 -> 19336 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-030.jpg | bin | 0 -> 40427 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-031.jpg | bin | 0 -> 35216 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-034.jpg | bin | 0 -> 10592 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-036.jpg | bin | 0 -> 25561 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-038.jpg | bin | 0 -> 33457 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-039.jpg | bin | 0 -> 32468 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-041.jpg | bin | 0 -> 13900 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-041a.jpg | bin | 0 -> 12001 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-041b.jpg | bin | 0 -> 15143 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-044.jpg | bin | 0 -> 35602 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-045.jpg | bin | 0 -> 26206 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-048.jpg | bin | 0 -> 45679 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-049.jpg | bin | 0 -> 27017 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-051.jpg | bin | 0 -> 23084 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-052.jpg | bin | 0 -> 20499 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-053.jpg | bin | 0 -> 25419 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-054.jpg | bin | 0 -> 32367 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-056.jpg | bin | 0 -> 42133 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-057.jpg | bin | 0 -> 26429 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-058.jpg | bin | 0 -> 17529 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-060.jpg | bin | 0 -> 45453 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-061.jpg | bin | 0 -> 20955 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-063.jpg | bin | 0 -> 21802 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-064.jpg | bin | 0 -> 23878 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-067.jpg | bin | 0 -> 26391 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-068.jpg | bin | 0 -> 33533 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-071.jpg | bin | 0 -> 23136 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-072.jpg | bin | 0 -> 44325 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-074.jpg | bin | 0 -> 24098 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-075.jpg | bin | 0 -> 19217 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-076.jpg | bin | 0 -> 22010 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-078.jpg | bin | 0 -> 32802 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-080.jpg | bin | 0 -> 33211 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-083.jpg | bin | 0 -> 23319 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-084.jpg | bin | 0 -> 37458 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-086.jpg | bin | 0 -> 37751 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-087.jpg | bin | 0 -> 22392 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-089.jpg | bin | 0 -> 47133 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-090.jpg | bin | 0 -> 35437 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-091.jpg | bin | 0 -> 20662 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-092.jpg | bin | 0 -> 47755 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-095.jpg | bin | 0 -> 23829 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-096.jpg | bin | 0 -> 47614 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-098.jpg | bin | 0 -> 21401 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-100.jpg | bin | 0 -> 31757 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-102.jpg | bin | 0 -> 40328 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-103.jpg | bin | 0 -> 24238 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-104.jpg | bin | 0 -> 20385 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-106.jpg | bin | 0 -> 22789 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-109.jpg | bin | 0 -> 62409 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-110.jpg | bin | 0 -> 28062 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-112.jpg | bin | 0 -> 21101 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-113.jpg | bin | 0 -> 40152 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-115.jpg | bin | 0 -> 41798 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-116.jpg | bin | 0 -> 29640 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-117.jpg | bin | 0 -> 41510 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991-h/images/i-118.jpg | bin | 0 -> 3527 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991.txt | 3197 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 23991.zip | bin | 0 -> 43336 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 |
79 files changed, 7118 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/23991-h.zip b/23991-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..0b03b35 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h.zip diff --git a/23991-h/23991-h.htm b/23991-h/23991-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bd0e5a4 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/23991-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,3905 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" + "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> +<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"> +<head> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1" /> +<title>The Project Gutenberg eBook of Mission Furniture, by H. H. Windsor</title> + <style type="text/css"> +/*<![CDATA[ XML blockout */ +<!-- + p { margin-top: .75em; + text-align: justify; + margin-bottom: .75em; + } + h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6 { + text-align: center; /* all headings centered */ + clear: both; + } + hr { width: 33%; + margin-top: 2em; + margin-bottom: 2em; + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; + clear: both; + } + + table {margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;} + + body{margin-left: 10%; + margin-right: 10%; + } + + .pagenum { /* uncomment the next line for invisible page numbers */ + /* visibility: hidden; */ + position: absolute; + left: 92%; + font-size: smaller; + text-align: right; + } /* page numbers */ + + .linenum {position: absolute; top: auto; left: 4%;} /* poetry number */ + .blockquot{margin-left: 5%; margin-right: 10%;} + + .bb {border-bottom: solid 2px;} + .bl {border-left: solid 2px;} + .bt {border-top: solid 2px;} + .br {border-right: solid 2px;} + .bbox {border: solid 2px;} + + .center {text-align: center;} + .smcap {font-variant: small-caps;} + .u {text-decoration: underline;} + + .caption {font-weight: bold;} + + .figcenter {margin: auto; margin-top: 3em; text-align: center;} + + .figleft {float: left; clear: left; margin-left: 0; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: + 1em; margin-right: 1em; padding: 0; text-align: center;} + + .figright {float: right; clear: right; margin-left: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em; + margin-top: 1em; margin-right: 0; padding: 0; text-align: center;} + + ul { list-style-type:none;} + .toc {margin-left: 10%; text-align: right} + hr.full { width: 100%; + margin-top: 3em; + margin-bottom: 0em; + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; + height: 4px; + border-width: 4px 0 0 0; /* remove all borders except the top one */ + border-style: solid; + border-color: #000000; + clear: both; } + pre {font-size: 85%;} + // --> + /* XML end ]]>*/ + </style> +</head> +<body> +<h1>The Project Gutenberg eBook, Mission Furniture, by H. H. Windsor</h1> +<pre> +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at <a href = "http://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a></pre> +<p>Title: Mission Furniture</p> +<p> How to Make It, Part 2</p> +<p>Author: H. H. Windsor</p> +<p>Release Date: December 25, 2007 [eBook #23991]</p> +<p>Language: English</p> +<p>Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1</p> +<p>***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK MISSION FURNITURE***</p> +<p> </p> +<h3>E-text prepared by K. Nordquist, Ross Wilburn,<br /> + and the Project Gutenberg Online Distributed Proofreading Team<br /> + (http://www.pgdp.net)</h3> +<p> </p> +<hr class="full" /> +<p> </p> +<p> </p> +<p> </p> + +<h1> +MISSION FURNITURE</h1> + +<h2>HOW TO MAKE IT</h2> + +<h2>PART TWO</h2> + +<hr style="width: 25%;" /> +<h2>POPULAR MECHANICS HANDBOOKS</h2> + +<hr style="width: 25%;" /> +<h2>CHICAGO</h2> +<h2>POPULAR MECHANICS COMPANY</h2> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> +<h3> +Copyrighted, 1910</h3> + +<h2>By H. H. WINDSOR</h2> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> +<p> +This book is one of the series of +handbooks on industrial subjects +being published by the Popular +Mechanics Co. Like the magazine, these +books are "written so you can understand +it," and are intended to furnish +information on mechanical subjects at a +price within the reach of all.</p> + +<p>The texts and illustrations have been +prepared expressly for this Handbook +Series, by experts; are up-to-date, and +have been revised by the editor of Popular +Mechanics.</p> + +<p>The dimensions given in the stock +list contained in the description +of each piece of furniture illustrated +in this book call for material +mill-planed, sanded and cut to length. +If the workman desires to have a complete +home-made article, allowance +must be made in the dimensions for +planing and squaring the pieces. S-4-S +and S-2-S are abbreviations for surface +four sides and surface two sides.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2>Contents</h2> + +<ul class="TOC"> +<li><a href="#List_of_Illustrations"><b>List of Illustrations</b></a></li> +<li><a href="#AN_OAK_BUFFET"><b>AN OAK BUFFET</b></a>, 5</li> +<li><a href="#OAK_STAIN"><b>OAK STAIN</b></a>, 9</li> +<li><a href="#A_PLAIN_OAK_HALL_CLOCK"><b>A PLAIN OAK HALL CLOCK</b></a>, 10</li> +<li><a href="#A_ROCKING_CHAIR"><b>A ROCKING CHAIR</b></a>, 14</li> +<li><a href="#A_CURVED_BACK_ARM_CHAIR"><b>A CURVED BACK ARM CHAIR</b></a>, 18</li> +<li><a href="#A_PLATE_RACK"><b>A PLATE RACK</b></a>, 21</li> +<li><a href="#TOOL_FOR_MARKING_DOWEL_HOLES"><b>TOOL FOR MARKING DOWEL HOLES</b></a>, 23</li> +<li><a href="#A_MAGAZINE_TABLE"><b>A MAGAZINE TABLE</b></a>, 24</li> +<li><a href="#A_WASTE_PAPER_BASKET"><b>A WASTE PAPER BASKET</b></a>, 27</li> +<li><a href="#AN_OAK_WRITING_DESK"><b>AN OAK WRITING DESK</b></a>, 29</li> +<li><a href="#AN_OAK_COUCH_WITH_CUSHIONS"><b>AN OAK COUCH WITH CUSHIONS</b></a>, 33</li> +<li><a href="#ELECTRIC_SHADE_FOR_THE_DINING_ROOM"><b>ELECTRIC SHADE FOR THE DINING ROOM</b></a>, 37</li> +<li><a href="#HOW_TO_BEND_WOOD"><b>HOW TO BEND WOOD</b></a>, 40</li> +<li><a href="#A_SMOKING_STAND"><b>A SMOKING STAND</b></a>, 43</li> +<li><a href="#A_CHINA_CLOSET"><b>A CHINA CLOSET</b></a>, 47</li> +<li><a href="#A_LEATHER-COVERED_FOOTSTOOL"><b>A LEATHER-COVERED FOOTSTOOL</b></a>, 50</li> +<li><a href="#ARTS-CRAFTS_MANTEL_CLOCK"><b>ARTS-CRAFTS MANTEL CLOCK</b></a>, 52</li> +<li><a href="#A_MUSIC_STAND"><b>A MUSIC STAND</b></a>, 55</li> +<li><a href="#MAKING_SCREWS_HOLD_IN_THE_END"><b>MAKING SCREWS HOLD IN THE END</b></a>, 58</li> +<li><a href="#A_WALL_CASE_WITH_A_MIRROR_DOOR"><b>A WALL CASE WITH A MIRROR DOOR</b></a>, 59</li> +<li><a href="#A_SIDE_CHAIR"><b>A SIDE CHAIR</b></a>, 62</li> +<li><a href="#AN_ARM_CHAIR"><b>AN ARM CHAIR</b></a>, 66</li> +<li><a href="#A_BOOKCASE"><b>A BOOKCASE</b></a>, 70</li> +<li><a href="#A_LAMP_STAND"><b>A LAMP STAND</b></a>, 73</li> +<li><a href="#AN_EXTENSION_DINING_TABLE"><b>AN EXTENSION DINING TABLE</b></a>, 77</li> +<li><a href="#AN_OAK-BOUND_CEDAR_CHEST"><b>AN OAK-BOUND CEDAR CHEST</b></a>, 79</li> +<li><a href="#A_TOOL_FOR_MAKING_MORTISES"><b>A TOOL FOR MAKING MORTISES</b></a>, 84</li> +<li><a href="#A_DRESSER_FOR_CHILDS_PLAYROOM"><b>A DRESSER FOR CHILD'S PLAYROOM</b></a>, 85</li> +<li><a href="#CUTTING_TENONS_WITH_A_HAND-SAW"><b>CUTTING TENONS WITH A HAND-SAW</b></a>, 90</li> +<li><a href="#ARTS_AND_CRAFTS_OIL_LAMP"><b>ARTS AND CRAFTS OIL LAMP</b></a>, 91</li> +<li><a href="#ANOTHER_CHINA_CLOSET"><b>ANOTHER CHINA CLOSET</b></a>, 94</li> +<li><a href="#AN_OAK_BEDSTEAD"><b>AN OAK BEDSTEAD</b></a>, 99</li> +<li><a href="#AN_OAK_FOOTSTOOL"><b>AN OAK FOOTSTOOL</b></a>, 101</li> +<li><a href="#A_LIBRARY_SET_IN_PYRO-CARVING"><b>A LIBRARY SET IN PYRO-CARVING</b></a>, 105</li> +<li><a href="#A_GRILLE_WITH_PEDESTALS_TO_MATCH"><b>A GRILLE WITH PEDESTALS TO MATCH</b></a>, 107</li> +<li><a href="#A_LADYS_WRITING_DESK"><b>A LADY'S WRITING DESK</b></a>, 108</li> +<li><a href="#A_TELEPHONE_STAND_AND_STOOL"><b>A TELEPHONE STAND AND STOOL</b></a>, 112</li> +<li><a href="#HOW_TO_MAKE_A_DOWEL-CUTTING_TOOL"><b>HOW TO MAKE A DOWEL-CUTTING TOOL</b></a>, 115</li> +<li><a href="#A_MEDICINE_CABINET"><b>A MEDICINE CABINET</b></a>, 1216</li> +</ul> + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="List_of_Illustrations" id="List_of_Illustrations"></a>List of Illustrations</h2> + +<ul class="TOC"> +<li><a href="#Finished_Buffet">Finished Buffet</a>, 5</li> + +<li><a href="#Details_of_Buffet">Details of Buffet</a>, 5</li> + +<li><a href="#Hall_Clock_Complete">Hall Clock Complete</a>, 11</li> + +<li><a href="#Details_of_Hall_Clock">Details of Hall Clock</a>, 11</li> + +<li><a href="#Rocking_Chair_Complete">Rocking Chair Complete</a>, 15</li> + +<li><a href="#Details_of_Rocking_Chair">Details of Rocking Chair</a>, 15</li> + +<li><a href="#Arm_Chair_Having_Bent-Wood_Back">Arm Chair Having Bent-Wood Back</a>, 19</li> + +<li><a href="#Details_of_Curved_Back_Arm_Chair">Details of Curved Back Arm Chair</a>, 19</li> + +<li><a href="#Parts_Held_Together_by_Keys">Parts Held Together by Keys</a>, 22</li> + +<li><a href="#Details_of_Plate_Rack">Details of Plate Rack</a>, 23</li> + +<li><a href="#Marking_Bore_Holes_for_Dowels">Marking Bore Holes for Dowels</a>, 24</li> + +<li><a href="#Table_Complete">Table Complete</a>, 25</li> + +<li><a href="#Details_of_Magazine_Table">Details of Magazine Table</a>, 27</li> + +<li><a href="#Waste_Paper_Basket">Waste Paper Basket</a>, 27</li> + +<li><a href="#Details_of_Waste_Paper_Basket">Details of Waste Paper Basket</a>, 29</li> + +<li><a href="#Details_of_Writing_Desk">Detail of Writing Desk</a>, 29</li> + +<li><a href="#Writing_Desk_Complete">Writing Desk Complete</a>, 31</li> + +<li><a href="#Couch_Complete">Couch Complete</a>, 34</li> + +<li><a href="#Details_of_Mission_Couch">Details of Mission Couch</a>, 35</li> + +<li><a href="#Details_of_Shade">Details of Shade</a>, 38</li> + +<li><a href="#Electric_Shade_Complete">Electric Shade Complete</a>, 39</li> + +<li><a href="#Steaming_Box">STEAMING BOX</a>, 41</li> + +<li><a href="#Hose_Attached_to_Teakettle">HOSE ATTACHED TO TEAKETTLE</a>, 41</li> + +<li><a href="#Form_Blocks">FORM BLOCKS</a>, 41</li> + +<li><a href="#Smoking_Stand_Details">Smoking Stand Details</a>, 43</li> + +<li><a href="#Finished_Smoking_Stand">Finished Smoking Stand</a>, 43</li> + +<li><a href="#Details_of_China">Details of China Closet</a>, 47</li> + +<li><a href="#China_Closet_Complete">China Closet Complete</a>, 49</li> + +<li><a href="#Footstool_Leather_Covered">Footstool Leather Covered</a>, 51</li> + +<li><a href="#Details_of_Footstool">Details of Footstool</a>, 52</li> + +<li><a href="#Mantel_Clock">Mantel Clock with Wood and Copper Front</a>, 53</li> + +<li><a href="#Details_of_Mantel_Clock">Details of Mantel Clock</a>, 54</li> + +<li><a href="#Details_of_Music_Stand">Details of Music Stand</a>, 55</li> + +<li><a href="#Music_Stand_Complete">Music Stand Complete</a>, 55</li> + +<li><a href="#Making_Screws_Hold">Making Screws Hold</a>, 58</li> + +<li><a href="#Wall_Case_Details">Wall Case Details, 60</a></li> + +<li><a href="#Case_with_Mirror_Door">Case with Mirror Door</a>, 61</li> + +<li><a href="#Side_Chair_Complete">Side Chair Complete</a>, 63</li> + +<li><a href="#Details_of_Side_Chair">Details of Side Chair</a>, 64</li> + +<li><a href="#Arm_Chair_Complete">Arm Chair Complete</a>, 67</li> + +<li><a href="#Details_of_Chair">Details of Chair</a>, 68</li> + +<li><a href="#Completed_Bookcase">Completed Bookcase</a>, 70</li> + +<li><a href="#Details_of_Bookcase">Details of Bookcase</a>, 70</li> + +<li><a href="#Details_of_Lamp_Stand">Details of Lamp Stand</a>, 74</li> + +<li><a href="#Electric_Lamp_Stand_Complete">Electric Lamp Stand Complete</a>, 75</li> + +<li><a href="#Extension_Dining_Table_Complete">Extension Dining Table Complete</a>, 77</li> + +<li><a href="#Details_of_Dining_Table">Details of Dining Table</a>, 77</li> + +<li><a href="#Details_of_Cedar_Chest">Details of Cedar Chest</a>, 79</li> + +<li><a href="#Cedar_Chest_Complete">Cedar Chest Complete</a>, 83</li> + +<li><a href="#Boring_Holes_for_Tenons">Boring Holes for Tenons</a>, 84</li> + +<li><a href="#Details_of_Dresser">Details of Dresser</a>, 85</li> + +<li><a href="#Dresser_Complete">Dresser Complete</a>, 88</li> + +<li><a href="#Drawer_Construction">DRAWER CONSTRUCTION</a>, 89</li> + +<li><a href="#Sawing_Tenons">Sawing Tenons</a>, 91</li> + +<li><a href="#Oil_Lamp">Artistic Mission Style Oil Lamp</a>, 91</li> + +<li><a href="#Bronze_Shade_Holder">Bronze Shade Holder</a>, 91</li> + +<li><a href="#China_Closet_with_Latticework">China Closet with Latticework Doors and Sides</a>, 96</li> + +<li><a href="#Details_of_China_Closet">Details of China Closet</a>, 96</li> + +<li><a href="#Oak_Bedstead_Complete">Oak Bedstead Complete</a>, 99</li> + +<li><a href="#Details_of_Oak_Bedstead">Details of Oak Bedstead</a>, 101</li> + +<li><a href="#Details_of_Stool">Details of Footstool</a>, 103</li> + +<li><a href="#Footstool_Complete">Footstool Complete</a>, 103</li> + +<li><a href="#Table_and_Seat">Table and Seat Decorated in Pyro-Carving</a>, 105</li> + +<li><a href="#Grille_for_an_Arch">Grille for an Arch</a>, 107</li> + +<li><a href="#Details_of_Writing">Details of Writing Desk</a>, 109</li> + +<li><a href="#Desk_Complete">Desk Complete</a>, 110</li> + +<li><a href="#Stand_and_Stool_Complete">Stand and Stool Complete</a>, 112</li> + +<li><a href="#Details_of_Stand_and_Stool">Details of Stand and Stool</a>, 112</li> + +<li><a href="#Make_Dowels">Easy Way to Make Dowels</a>, 116</li> + +<li><a href="#Medicine_Cabinet_Complete">Medicine Cabinet Complete</a>, 116</li> + +<li><a href="#Details_of_Medicine_Cabinet">Details of Medicine Cabinet</a>, 117</li></ul> + + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="AN_OAK_BUFFET" id="AN_OAK_BUFFET"></a>AN OAK BUFFET</h2> + + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Finished_Buffet" id="Finished_Buffet"></a> +<img src="images/i-005.jpg" width="600" height="575" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Finished Buffet</span> +</div> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Details_of_Buffet" id="Details_of_Buffet"></a> +<img src="images/i-006.jpg" width="600" height="388" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Details of Buffet</span> +</div> + +<p>The accompanying sketch and detail drawing show +a design of a buffet wherein refinement of outline +and harmony of details are conspicuously regarded. +Quarter-sawed oak is the most suitable wood for +this handsome piece of mission furniture. The +material should be ordered from the mill ready cut +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_7" id="Page_7">[Pg 7]</a></span> + +to length, squared and sanded. Following is a list +of the stock needed:</p> + +<ul><li>2 back posts, 2 by 2 by 47-3/4 in.</li> +<li>2 front posts, 2 by 2 by 45-1/2 in.</li> +<li>4 rails, 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 50-1/2 in.</li> +<li>2 end rails, 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 18-1/2 in.</li> +<li>4 end rails, 3/4 by 4 by 18-1/2 in.</li> +<li>4 pieces for end panel, 3/4 by 3-1/2 by 21 in.</li> +<li>2 panels, 3/8 by 12 by 21 in.</li> +<li>1 top board, 3/4 by 17-1/2 by 47-1/4 in.</li> +<li>1 back board, 3/4 by 11-1/2 by 47-1/4 in.</li> +<li>1 shelf board, 3/4 by 2 by 46 in.</li> +<li>2 brackets, 1 by 2 by 7-3/4 in.</li> +<li>4 pieces for doors, 3/4 by 4 by 11 in.</li> +<li>2 panels, 3/8 by 11 by 17-1/2 in.</li> +<li>1 piece for drawer, 3/4 by 8 by 22-1/2 in.</li> +<li>1 piece for drawer, 3/4 by 7-1/2 by 22-1/2 in.</li> +<li>1 piece for drawer, 3/4 by 7 by 22-1/2 in.</li> +<li>2 pieces, 1/2 by 8 by 19-1/4 in.; soft wood.</li> +<li>2 pieces, 1/2 by 7-1/2 by 19-1/4 in.; soft wood.</li> +<li>2 pieces, 1/2 by 7 by 19-1/4 in.; soft wood.</li> +<li>1 piece, 1/2 by 8 by 19-1/4 in.; soft wood.</li> +<li>1 piece, 1/2 by 7-1/2 by 19-1/4 in.; soft wood.</li> +<li>1 piece, 1/2 by 7 by 19-1/4 in.; soft wood.</li> +<li>1 bottom board, 3/4 by 17-1/2 by 47-1/4 in.; soft wood.</li> +<li>2 partitions (several pieces), 3/4 by 20 by 24-3/4 in.</li> +<li>2 front pieces, 3/4 by 2 by 23 in.</li> +<li>2 back pieces. 3/4 by 2 by 23 in.; soft wood.</li> +<li>2 side pieces, 3/4 by 2 by 21-1/2 in.; soft wood.</li> +<li>1 back (several pieces), 3/8 by 25 by 46 in.</li> +<li>1 mirror frame (to suit mirror).</li></ul> + + +<p>Start to work on the four posts by squaring them up to the proper length +in pairs and beveling the tops as shown. Clamp all four pieces on a flat +surface with the bottom ends even, then lay out the mortises for the +rails and panels on all four pieces at once with a try-square. This +insures getting the mortises all the same height. The back posts also +have a mortise cut in them at the top for the back board as shown. Lay +out the tenons on the ends of the front and back rails in the same +manner. Cut them to fit the mortises in the posts, also rabbet the back +rails for the backing. Cut tenons on the end rails and rabbet them and +the side pieces for the panels.</p> + +<p>Lay out the top and bottom boards to the proper +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_8" id="Page_8">[Pg 8]</a></span> +size and notch the corners to fit about the posts. +These boards are fastened to the 1-1/2-in. square rails +with dowels and glue. They can now be glued together +and set away to dry. The top board is of oak, +and be sure to get the best side up, while the bottom +one can be made of soft wood if desired.</p> + +<p>The partitions are made of several boards glued together. Be careful to +get an oak board on the outer edge. The drawer slides are set into the +partitions as shown and are fastened in place with screws from the +inside.</p> + +<p>The top back board has a tenon on each end that fits into the mortises +in the back posts and is rounded at the top as shown. The shelf is also +rounded at the ends and is fastened to the back with screws.</p> + +<p>A plate glass mirror should be provided for the back. This is fitted to +the back board as shown, then the brackets put up at the ends of the +mirror frame.</p> + +<p>The main parts are now ready to be assembled and glued together. Before +applying any glue, see that all the joints fit together perfectly. The +end rails and the panels are glued together first and allowed to dry. Be +very careful to get the parts clamped together perfectly square and +straight, else you will have trouble later on. When these ends are dry +slip them on the tenons on the front and back rails which are already +fastened to the top and bottom boards.</p> + +<p>The back board and the partitions must be in place when this is done. +Pin and glue the joints and clamp the whole together square and leave to +dry.</p> + +<p>The doors are now made by mortising the top and +bottom pieces to take the 3/8-in. panel which is glued +in place. The drawers are made as shown in the +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_9" id="Page_9">[Pg 9]</a></span> +sketch. The front board should be oak, but the remainder +can be made of soft wood. The joints are +nailed and glued. Suitable hinges for the doors and +handles for the drawers should be provided. Antique +copper trimmings look very well with this style +of furniture and can be secured at most any hardware +store.</p> + +<p>The back is made of soft wood and is put on in the +usual manner. Scrape all surplus glue from about +the joints, as stain will not take where there is any +glue. Finish smooth with fine sandpaper, then apply +the stain you like best. This can be any one of +the many mission stains supplied by the trade for +this purpose.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="OAK_STAIN" id="OAK_STAIN"></a>OAK STAIN</h2> + + +<p>An easy and at the same time a good way to +stain oak in imitation of the fumed effect, is to boil +catechu in the proportion of 1/4 lb. to 6 lb. of water, +after which cool and strain. Apply this to the +wood, and when dry treat with a solution of bichromate +of potash in the same proportion as with the +catechu. Bichromate of potash alone in water will +give a good stain. A solution of 2 oz. of pearl ash +and 2 oz. of potash mixed in a quart of water makes +a good stain. Potash solution darkens the wood, +and when applied very strong will produce an almost +ebon hue, due to what we might describe as the +burning of the wood fiber. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_10" id="Page_10">[Pg 10]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="A_PLAIN_OAK_HALL_CLOCK" id="A_PLAIN_OAK_HALL_CLOCK"></a>A PLAIN OAK HALL CLOCK</h2> + + +<p>The hall clock shown in the illustration should be +made of plain oak. The following pieces will be +needed to make it:</p> + +<ul><li>2 back posts, 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 81 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>2 front posts, 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 21 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>2 front posts, 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 44 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>10 front and back horizontals, 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 15 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>10 side horizontals, 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 11 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>1 face, 3/8 by 14 by 14 in., S-4-S.</li></ul> + + +<p>FRONT DOORS</p> + +<ul><li>4 rails, 3/4 by 1-1/2 by 18 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>4 stiles, 3/4 by 1-1/2 by 12 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>4 horizontal mullions, 3/16 by 3/4 by 11 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>4 horizontal mullions, 3/16 by 5/8 by 11 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>4 vertical mullions, 3/16 by 3/4 by 15 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>2 vertical mullions, 3/16 by 5/8 by 15 in., S-4-S.</li></ul> + + +<p>BACK</p> + +<ul><li>1 piece, 3/8 by 14 by 21 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>2 pieces, 3/8 by 14 by 18 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>4 horizontal mullions, 3/16 by 5/8 by 14 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>4 vertical mullions, 3/16 by 5/8 by 20 in., S-4-S.</li></ul> + + +<p>TOP SIDE PANELS</p> + +<ul><li>2 pieces, 3/8 by 9-1/2 by 14 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>8 horizontal mullions, 3/16 by 5/8 by 9-1/2 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>6 vertical mullions, 3/16 by 5/8 by 14 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>2 middle side panels, 3/4 by 9-1/2 by 20 in., S-2-S.</li></ul> + + +<p>LOWER SIDE PANELS</p> + +<ul><li>8 vertical mullions, 3/16 by 3/4 by 18 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>8 vertical mullions, 3/16 by 5/8 by 18 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>8 horizontal mullions, 3/16 by 3/4 by 9-1/2 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>8 horizontal mullions, 3/16 by 5/8 by 9-1/2 in., S-4-S.</li></ul> + + +<p>If the worker will take the trouble to combine the +different lengths of pieces having like thicknesses +and widths into pieces of standard lengths, he will be +able to save himself some expense at the mill with +no more work for himself.</p> + +<p>Begin work by shaping the ends of the posts as indicated +in the drawing. Lay out and cut the mortises +for the tenons of the horizontals or rails. These +mortises need not be deep if the joints are to be reinforced +later with lag screws as is the clock shown. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_11" id="Page_11">[Pg 11]</a></span> +They may be what are known as stub tenons and mortises. The tenons are +not more than 1/2 in. long, just enough to keep the rail from turning +about.</p> + +<p>Next lay out and cut the tenons on the rails. Bore the holes for the lag +screws, being careful to bore on adjacent surfaces so that the holes +will miss each other. Use a 3/8 by 3-in. lag screw, boring the hole in +the tenon with a 1/4-in. bit the full depth the screw is to enter.</p> + +<p>The side panels should be fitted into grooves in the rails, and before +the frame is put together these panels should be squared up and the +grooves cut in the rails and posts at the proper places.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 159px;"><a name="Hall_Clock_Complete" id="Hall_Clock_Complete"></a> +<img src="images/i-011.jpg" width="159" height="600" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Hall Clock Complete</span> +</div> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_12" id="Page_12">[Pg 12]</a></span></p> +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 308px;"><a name="Details_of_Hall_Clock" id="Details_of_Hall_Clock"></a> +<img src="images/i-012.jpg" width="308" height="600" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Details of Hall Clock</span> +</div> + +<p>The mullions of the lower side panels, it will be noted, are specified +5/8 and 3/4 in. wide. The 5/8-in. pieces are for the central parts of +the frame and the others for the outside. The frame is to be made 1/8 +in. larger all around than the distance between the posts and between +the rails so that it may be set in + +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_13" id="Page_13">[Pg 13]</a></span> +grooves cut in the posts and the rails to a similar +depth, 1/8 in. This is true, also, of the mullions +of the front doors. Square up the shelves so that +they may be set into grooves in the adjacent rails. +The middle shelf is to have an overhang and will +rest upon the rails.</p> + +<p>The mullions of the top side panels are all of the +same width, and it is not intended or necessary to +set their frame into grooves in the posts. The wood +panel back of them gives ample strength.</p> + +<p>It is a good plan not to groove the panel upon +which the figures are placed, and which becomes +the face of the clock. It is better to fit this piece +in and fasten metal or wood buttons on the back +side so that it can be readily taken off to get at the +clock movement from the front.</p> + +<p>Make the doors, tenoning the rails into the stiles +and grooving both to receive the mullioned framework +of 3/16-in. stuff.</p> + +<p>Put the whole frame together, using good hot +glue for the joints. When the glue has dried sufficiently +to allow the clamps to be taken off, fit the +doors and hinge them. Butterfly surface hinges look +well and are the easiest to apply.</p> + +<p>Thoroughly scrape all the surplus glue off and +sandpaper the parts preparatory to applying the +finish.</p> + +<p>To finish, apply one coat of mission oak water +stain. When dry, sandpaper lightly, using No. 00 +paper. Apply a second coat, diluted with an equal +amount of water. Sand this lightly and put on a +very thin coat of shellac to keep the filler color, +which follows, from discoloring the high lights. +When the shellac has had time to harden, sand +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_14" id="Page_14">[Pg 14]</a></span> +lightly and put on a coat of paste filler. Use light +filler, colored with umber and Venetian red in the +proportion of 12 oz, of umber, and 4 oz. of red to +20 lb. of filler. The directions for applying the filler +will be found on the can labels. On the hardened +filler apply a thin coat of shellac. Sand the shellac +lightly and put on several coats of some good floor +wax, polishing well according to the directions on +the can. This is what is known as a mission oak +finish and is quite popular for this type of furniture +design.</p> + +<p>The metal figures for the dial come with the clock +movement. Some of the movements come already +set in boxes of wood so that all one needs to do is +to shape the projecting ends of the wood containing +boxes and fasten them to the frame with screws +from the back. A clock with dial figures, eight-day +movement, striking the hours and half hours, with +cathedral gong can be bought for $4, possibly less.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="A_ROCKING_CHAIR" id="A_ROCKING_CHAIR"></a>A ROCKING CHAIR</h2> + + +<p>In furniture construction such as this, nothing is +gained by trying to plane up the stock out of the +rough. This is mere drudgery and can be more +cheaply and easily done at the planing mill by +machinery. There will be plenty to do to cut and +fit all the different parts. Order the pieces mill-planed +and sandpapered to the sizes specified below.</p> + +<p>Plain sawed red oak takes a mission finish nicely +and is appropriate. Some people like quartered +white oak better, however. The cost is about the +same.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_15" id="Page_15">[Pg 15]</a></span></p> + +<p>The stock for the chair is as follows: Widths and +thicknesses are specified exact except for the rear +posts and the rockers; but to the lengths enough surplus +stock has been added to allow for squaring +the ends.</p> + +<ul><li>2 front posts, 1-5/8 by 2-1/4 by 22-1/2 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>2 back posts, 1-5/8 by 11 by 40 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>1 front horizontal, 3/4 by 3-1/2 by 22 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>1 back horizontal, 3/4 by 3-1/2 by 20 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>2 back horizontals, 3/4 by 3-1/2 by 20 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>2 side horizontals, 3/4 by 3-1/2 by 20 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>2 back slats, 5/16 by 3-1/2 by 20 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>2 arms, 1 by 4-1/2 by 25 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>1 rocker, 2-1/4 by 6 by 33 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>5 bottom slats, 3/4 by 2-1/2 by 19-1/2 in., S-4-S.</li></ul> + + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Rocking_Chair_Complete" id="Rocking_Chair_Complete"></a> +<img src="images/i-015.jpg" width="600" height="608" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Rocking Chair Complete</span> +</div> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_16" id="Page_16">[Pg 16]</a></span></p> +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Details_of_Rocking_Chair" id="Details_of_Rocking_Chair"></a> +<img src="images/i-016.jpg" width="600" height="267" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Details of Rocking Chair</span> +</div> + +<p>Begin work on the posts first. The front posts +should have one end of each squared, after which +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_17" id="Page_17">[Pg 17]</a></span> +they can be cut to the exact length. The rear +posts, according to the stock bill, are specified for +the exact thickness. By exercising forethought, both +may be got from the piece ordered. The tops and +bottoms of the posts should have their edges slightly +chamfered to prevent their slivering.</p> + +<p>The shape of the arm is a little out of the ordinary, +but the drawing indicates quite clearly how +it is cut. The arm is fastened to the posts by means +of dowels and glue after the other parts of the chair +have been put together.</p> + +<p>Now prepare the curved parts of the back. These +parts are worked to size, after which they are +thoroughly steamed and bent in the forms described +on another page. These forms should have a surface +curve whose radius is 22 in. While the parts are +drying out, go ahead with the cutting of the mortises +and tenons of post and rail.</p> + +<p>Inasmuch as the width of the front of the chair +exceeds that of the back by 2 in., allowance must +be made for slant either in the tenons of the side +rails or in the mortises. This will necessitate the +use of the bevel in laying off the shoulders of the +tenons.</p> + +<p>The slats for the bottom are made long enough so +that their ends may be "let into" the front and back +rails, a 3/4-in. groove being plowed to receive them.</p> + +<p>Assemble the back, then the front; and when the +glue on them has dried, put the side rails in place, +then the arms. The chair should now be scraped +and sandpapered preparatory to applying the finish.</p> + +<p>The cushion shown in the picture is made of +Spanish roan skin leather and is filled with elastic +felt. Such cushions can be purchased at the upholsterer's +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_18" id="Page_18">[Pg 18]</a></span> +or they can be made by the craftsman +himself. Frequently the two parts of the cushion +are laced together by means of leather thongs.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="A_CURVED_BACK_ARM_CHAIR" id="A_CURVED_BACK_ARM_CHAIR"></a>A CURVED BACK ARM CHAIR</h2> + + +<p>The arm chair, the picture and drawing of which +is given herewith is a companion piece to the rocker +described on another page.</p> + +<p>With the exception of the back-legs the stock bill +which follows gives the thicknesses and widths +exact. To the length, however, enough has been +added to allow squaring up the ends.</p> + +<p>Plain sawed white or red oak will be suitable for +a design such as this.</p> + +<ul><li>Front posts, 2 pieces, 1-5/8 by 2-1/4 by 26 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>Back posts, 1 piece, 1-5/8 by 8 by 45 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>Front horizontals, 2 pieces, 3/4 by 3-1/2 by 21-1/2 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>Rear horizontals, 4 pieces, 3/4 by 3-1/2 by 19-1/4 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>Side horizontals, 4 pieces, 3/4 by 3-1/2 by 19-1/2 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>Back slats, 2 pieces, 5/16 by 3-1/2 by 19-1/2 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>Arms, 2 pieces, 1-1/8 by 4 by 24 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>Seat slats, 5 pieces, 1/2 by 2-1/4 by 20 in., S-4-S.</li></ul> + + +<p>Begin work by squaring up the ends of the front +posts and shaping the rear ones Chamfer the ends +of the tops and bottoms slightly so that they shall +not splinter through usage. Next lay out the mortises +and tenons.</p> + +<p>The curved horizontals for the back should now +be prepared and steamed as described on another +page. The curved form to which the steamed piece +is to be clamped to give shape to it should be curved +slightly more than is wanted in the piece, as the +piece when released will tend to straighten a little.</p> + +<p>The arms of the chair may be shaped while these +pieces are drying on the forms. The rails of the +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_19" id="Page_19">[Pg 19]</a></span> +front and back may be tenoned, too. It should be +noted that the front of the chair is wider than the +back. This will necessitate care in mortising and +tenoning the side rails so as to get good fits for the +shoulders The bevel square will be needed in laying +out the shoulders of the tenons.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 480px;"> +<a name="Arm_Chair_Having_Bent-Wood_Back" id="Arm_Chair_Having_Bent-Wood_Back"></a> +<img src="images/i-019.jpg" width="480" height="600" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Arm Chair Having Bent-Wood Back</span> +</div> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_20" id="Page_20">[Pg 20]</a></span></p> +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Details_of_Curved_Back_Arm_Chair" +id="Details_of_Curved_Back_Arm_Chair"></a> +<img src="images/i-020.jpg" width="600" height="371" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Details of Curved Back Arm Chair</span> +</div> + +<p>Assemble the back, then the front. When the +glue has hardened on these parts so that the clamps +may be removed, put in the side rails or horizontals +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_21" id="Page_21">[Pg 21]</a></span> +and again adjust the clamps. The arms are to be +fastened to the posts with dowels and glue.</p> + +<p>The seat, it will be seen from the drawing, is to be a loose leather +cushion to rest upon slats. These seat slats may be fastened to cleats +which have been previously fastened to the inside of the front and back +seat rails or they may be "let in" to these rails by grooving their +inner surfaces before the rails have been put in place. The latter +method is more workmanlike, but more difficult.</p> + +<p>A cushion such as is shown can be purchased ready made up, or it may be +made by the amateur by lacing together two pieces of Spanish leather cut +to size and punched along the edges so as to allow a lacing of leather +thong. It may be filled with hair or elastic felt such as upholsterers +use.</p> + +<p>Probably the simplest finish that can be used is weathered oak. Put on a +coat of weather oak oil stain, sandpaper lightly when dry and then put +on a very thin coat of shellac. Sand this lightly and follow with two or +more coats of floor wax put on in very thin coatings and polished well.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="A_PLATE_RACK" id="A_PLATE_RACK"></a>A PLATE RACK</h2> + + +<p>The plate rack shown in the accompanying illustration is designed for +use in a room furnished in mission style. The dimensions may be changed +to suit the wall space. The parts are held together entirely by keys. +The bar across the front is for keeping the plates from falling out, but +this may be left out if the plates are allowed to lean against the wall.</p> + +<p>The following list of material will be needed, and, +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_22" id="Page_22">[Pg 22]</a></span> +if the builder does not care to do the rough work, +the stock can be ordered planed, sanded and cut to +the exact size of the dimensions given.</p> + +<ul><li>2 ends, 7/8 by 5 by 20 in.</li> +<li>1 top, 7/8 by 6 by 36 in.</li> +<li>1 shelf, 7/8 by 5 by 36 in.</li> +<li>1 bar, 7/8 in. square by 36 in.</li> +<li>4 keys. Scrap pieces will do.</li></ul> + + +<p>Lay out and cut the mortises on the end pieces for +the tenons of the shelf, also the tenons on the top +ends and the diamond shaped openings. In laying +these out, work from the back edge of the pieces. +Cut the tenons on the ends of the shelf to fit the +mortises in the end pieces, numbering each one so +the parts can be put together with the tenons in +the proper mortises. Mark out and cut the mortises +in the top to receive the tenons on the end +pieces.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Parts_Held_Together_by_Keys" +id="Parts_Held_Together_by_Keys"></a> +<img src="images/i-022.jpg" width="600" height="456" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Parts Held Together by Keys</span> +</div> + +<p>In laying out the mortises for the keys allow a little +extra on the side toward the shoulder so the ends +and tops may be drawn up tightly when the keys are +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_23" id="Page_23">[Pg 23]</a></span> +driven in the mortises. All the mortises and diamond +shaped openings should be marked and cut +with a chisel from both sides of the board.</p> + +<p>If the bar is used, it may be attached with a flat +side or edge out as shown.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Details_of_Plate_Rack" +id="Details_of_Plate_Rack"></a> +<img src="images/i-023.jpg" width="600" height="450" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Details of Plate Rack</span> +</div> + +<p>Finish the pieces separately with any weathered +or fumed oak stain. When thoroughly dry, apply +a very thin coat of shellac. Finish with two coats of +wax. The rack can be attached to the wall by two +mirror plates fastened on the back edges of the end +pieces.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="TOOL_FOR_MARKING_DOWEL_HOLES" id="TOOL_FOR_MARKING_DOWEL_HOLES"></a>TOOL FOR MARKING DOWEL HOLES</h2> + + +<p>On some work it is quite difficult to locate the +exact point for a dowel, but with the tool illustrated +placed between the joint to be made and the parts +gently pressed together you have the exact point for +the dowel in each piece. The tool is made from a +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_24" id="Page_24">[Pg 24]</a></span> +piece of sheet steel about 1/2 in. square with a pin +having a point on both ends driven in the center, +as shown in Fig. 1. The tool is placed between the +pieces that are to be joined, as shown in Fig. 2. +The small pin will mark the point for the bit in both +pieces exactly opposite.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Marking_Bore_Holes_for_Dowels" +id="Marking_Bore_Holes_for_Dowels"></a> +<img src="images/i-024.jpg" width="600" height="271" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Marking Bore Holes for Dowels</span> +</div> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="A_MAGAZINE_TABLE" id="A_MAGAZINE_TABLE"></a>A MAGAZINE TABLE</h2> + + +<p>This little magazine table will be found a very useful +piece of furniture for the den or library. Its small +size permits it to be set anywhere in a room without +being in the way. Quarter-sawed oak should be used +in its construction, and the following pieces will be +needed:</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>4 legs, 2 by 2 by 29 in., S-4-S. +4 end slats, 1/2 by 2 by 10 in., S-4-S. +1 shelf, 1 by 16 by 30 in., S-1-S. +1 top board, 1 by 18 by 36 in., S-1-S.</p></div> + +<p>If you are convenient to a planing mill you can secure +these pieces ready cut to length, squared and +sanded. This will save you considerable labor.</p> + +<p>The four legs are finished on all sides and chamfered +at the bottom to prevent the corners from splitting. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_25" id="Page_25">[Pg 25]</a></span> +The mortises for the shelf should be cut 9 in. +from the top of each leg, as shown in the sketch. Care +should be taken to make these a perfect fit.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Table_Complete" +id="Table_Complete"></a> +<img src="images/i-025.jpg" width="600" height="460" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Table Complete</span> +</div> + +<p>The shelf should be finished on the top side and +the four edges, and the corners cut out to fit the mortises +in the table legs. An enlarged view of this joint +is shown in the sketch.</p> + +<p>The top board may have to be made of two 9-in. +boards, dove-tailed and glued together. It should be +finished on the top side and the edges. The edges can +be beveled if desired. The board is fastened to the legs +by means of screws through four small brass angles. +These angles can be made or they can be purchased +at any hardware store. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_26" id="Page_26">[Pg 26]</a></span></p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Details_of_Magazine_Table" +id="Details_of_Magazine_Table"></a> +<img src="images/i-026.jpg" width="600" height="328" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Details of Magazine Table</span> +</div><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_27" id="Page_27">[Pg 27]</a></span></p> + +<p>The top board and the shelf should be mortised at +each end for the 1/2 by 2-in. slats. These slats should +be finished on all sides.</p> + +<p>The table is now ready to be assembled and glued +together. The glue should dry at least 24 hours before +the clamps are removed.</p> + +<p>After the glue is dry, carefully go over the entire +table with fine sandpaper and remove all surplus glue +and rough spots. It can now be finished in any one of +the mission stains which are supplied by the trade for +this purpose.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="A_WASTE_PAPER_BASKET" id="A_WASTE_PAPER_BASKET"></a>A WASTE PAPER BASKET</h2> + + +<p>A waste paper basket of pleasing design, and very +easy to construct, is shown in the accompanying +sketch. Quarter-sawed oak +is the best wood to use, and +it is also the easiest to obtain. +The following pieces +will be needed:</p> + +<ul><li>1 bottom piece, 3/4 by 9 in. square.</li> +<li>4 corner pieces, 3/4 in. square by 15-1/2 in.</li> +<li>4 top rails, 3/4 in. square by 7-1/2 in.</li> +<li>12 slats, 1/4 by 3/4 by 16-1/4 in.</li> +<li>4 blocks, 1 in. square.</li> +<li>4 F.H. screws, 2-1/2 in. long.</li> +<li>24 R.H. screws, 3/4 in. long.</li></ul> + + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 429px;"><a name="Waste_Paper_Basket" +id="Waste_Paper_Basket"></a> +<img src="images/i-027.jpg" width="429" height="600" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">A WASTE PAPER BASKET</span> +</div> + +<p>If the pieces are ordered from the mill cut to length, squared and +sanded, much labor will be saved. First bevel the ends of the corner +posts and the slats, as shown, and finish them with +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_28" id="Page_28">[Pg 28]</a></span> +sandpaper. Bore the holes in the posts and the railing for the dowel +pins. These pins should be about 3/8 in. in diameter and 3/4 in. long. +When this is done the parts can be glued together and laid aside to dry. +The four blocks 1 in. square are for the feet. Bore holes through these +blocks and the corners of the bottom board for the large screws to go +through. Fasten them together by running the screws through the blocks, +and the board into the ends of the corner posts as shown in the sketch. +The 1/4-in. slats can now be fastened on with the small round-headed +screws. They should be evenly spaced on the four sides. This completes +the basket except for the finish. This can be any one of the many +finishes supplied by the trade for this purpose.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 186px;"><a name="Details_of_Waste_Paper_Basket" +id="Details_of_Waste_Paper_Basket"></a> +<img src="images/i-028.jpg" width="186" height="600" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">DETAILS OF WASTE PAPER BASKET</span> +</div><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_29" id="Page_29">[Pg 29]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="AN_OAK_WRITING_DESK" id="AN_OAK_WRITING_DESK"></a>AN OAK WRITING DESK</h2> + + +<p>For the writing desk shown in the accompanying +picture the following stock will be needed. The thicknesses +of all the pieces are specified. On the legs the +widths, too, are specified. Quarter-sawed white oak is +the best wood to use, and it should be well seasoned +and clear of shakes and other imperfections.</p> + +<p>STOCK BILL</p> + +<ul><li>2 front posts, 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 by 34 in., S-4-S., oak.</li> +<li>2 back posts, 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 by 42 in., S-4-S., oak.</li> +<li>2 lower side rails, 3/4 by 3-1/4 by 15 in., S-2-S., oak.</li> +<li>1 lower back rail, 3/4 by 3-1/4 by 27 in., S-2-S., oak.</li> +<li>2 sides, 3/4 by 9 by 14 in., S-2-S., oak.</li> +<li>2 sides, 3/4 by 10-1/2 by 14 in., S-2-S., oak.</li> +<li>1 back, 3/4 by 9 by 26 in., S-2-S., oak.</li> +<li>1 back, 3/4 by 10-1/2 by 26 in., S-2-S., oak.</li> +<li>1 top, 3/4 by 6 by 30-in., S-2-S., oak.</li> +<li>1 lid, 3/4 by 15 by 28 in., S-2-S., oak.</li> +<li>2 side shelves, 3/4 by 5 by 16 in., S-2-S., oak.</li> +<li>4 braces, 3/4 by 1-1/4 by 9 in., S-2-S., oak.</li> +<li>1 bottom of case, 3/4 by 16 by 28 in., S-2-S., oak.</li></ul> + + +<p>INTERIOR</p> + +<ul><li>1 piece, 3/4 by 16 by 27 in., S-2-S., oak.</li> +<li>4 drawer and case bottom supports, 3/4 by 2-1/2 by 28 in., S-2-S., oak.</li> +<li>6 drawer and case bottom supports, 3/4 by 2-1/2 by 16 in., S-2-S., oak.</li> +<li>4 drawer guides, 3/4 by 3/4 by 16 in., S-2-S., oak.</li></ul> + + +<p>DRAWERS</p> + +<ul><li>2 front pieces, 3/4 by 7-1/2 by 13 in., S-2-S., oak.</li> +<li>4 side pieces, 3/8 by 7-1/2 by 16 in., S-2-S., poplar.</li> +<li>2 back pieces, 3/8 by 7 by 12 in., S-2-S., poplar.</li> +<li>2 bottom pieces, 3/8 by 16 by 12 in., S-2-S., poplar.</li></ul> + + +<p>PIGEON HOLES</p> + +<ul><li>1 bottom, 3/16 by 7-1/4 by 27 in., S-2-S., poplar.</li> +<li>1 top, 3/16 by 4-1/2 by 27 in., S-2-S., poplar.</li> +<li>4 verticals, 3/16 by 7-1/4 by 10 in., S-2-S., poplar.</li> +<li>1 vertical, 3/16 by 4-1/2 by 4 in., S-2-S., poplar.</li> +<li>5 horizontals, 3/16 by 7-1/2 by 9 in., S-2-S., poplar.</li> +<li>2 horizontals, 4-1/2 by 9 in., S-2-S., poplar.</li></ul> + + +<p>DRAWERS IN PIGEON HOLES</p> + +<ul><li>2 front, 3/8 by 2-1/4 by 9 in., S-2-S., poplar.</li> +<li>4 sides, 3/16 by 2-1/4 by 7-1/4 in., S-2-S., poplar.</li> +<li>2 backs, 3/16 by 2-1/4 by 9 in., S-2-S., poplar.</li> +<li>2 bottoms, 3/16 by 7-1/4 by 9 in., S-2-S., poplar.</li></ul> + + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_30" id="Page_30">[Pg 30]</a></span></p> +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Details_of_Writing_Desk" +id="Details_of_Writing_Desk"></a> +<img src="images/i-030.jpg" width="600" height="425" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Detail of Writing Desk</span> +</div> + +<p>Begin work by cutting the posts to length and shape. +Having done this, lay out the tenons on the lower +rails so as to have the required distances between the +shoulders, and then cut them. Now cut the parts to +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_31" id="Page_31">[Pg 31]</a></span> +be worked into the frames that support the drawer +and bottom of the case, and glue them properly. +While this is drying, the other parts of the case may +be laid out and shaped. It is intended that the sides +of the case shall splice on the edge of the bottom +of the pigeon hole case. In this manner the side +shelves will cover the joint on either end. The back +may be made up into one solid piece. Make the side +pieces of the case long enough to be housed into the +posts about 3/8 in. at each end.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 572px;"><a name="Writing_Desk_Complete" +id="Writing_Desk_Complete"></a> +<img src="images/i-031.jpg" width="572" height="600" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Writing Desk Complete</span> +</div> + +<p>The shelves at the ends of the desk should be +fastened after the frame is put together and before +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_32" id="Page_32">[Pg 32]</a></span> +the bottom of the case for the pigeon holes is fitted +and fastened. In so doing the shelves may be fastened +from the inside of the case. The angles of the +braces are 30-60 deg. It will be noted that the edges +of the lid are rabbeted. Another way is to have the +lid large enough to fit entirely over the sides of the +case and change the slope to correspond.</p> + +<p>The drawers may be made next. The fronts +should be of oak, but the other parts of yellow poplar. +An examination of an ordinary drawer will +show the manner of construction.</p> + +<p>Make the frame of the pigeon holes of 3/16-in. yellow +poplar. The drawing shows an arrangement entirely +independent of the sides of the desk so that +the frame can be made and slipped in place after +the finish has been put on. Two drawers are shown. +These are faced front and back alike so as to secure +as much room in the drawer as possible.</p> + +<p>In the finishing, the poplar wood should be finished +with white shellac in the natural light color of +the wood. For the oak parts the following is appropriate +for this design: Apply one coat of green +Flemish water stain. When this has dried, sandpaper +lightly until the raised grain has been removed, +and apply another coat of stain diluted one-half +with water. When dry, sand lightly and apply +a very thin coat of shellac. Sand lightly and apply +a coat of dark filler, natural filler colored with lamp-black, +according to the somberness of the finish desired. +Upon this put a coat of orange shellac. After +this, put on two coats of a good rubbing varnish. +Rub the first coats with curled hair or haircloth and +the last with pulverized pumice stone and raw linseed +oil or crude oil.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_33" id="Page_33">[Pg 33]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="AN_OAK_COUCH_WITH_CUSHIONS" id="AN_OAK_COUCH_WITH_CUSHIONS"></a>AN OAK COUCH WITH CUSHIONS</h2> + + +<p>This beautiful piece of mission furniture can be +made at a very moderate cost, if the material used +for the cushions is of good imitation leather. +These substitutes for leather last fully as long and +the difference can only be detected by an expert. +White oak will give the best results except for the +frames or slats on which the cushions rest and +these may be made of poplar or pine. If a mill or +woodworking shop of any kind is handy, the hardest +part of the work can be saved by securing the +following list of material, cut, planed, sanded and +squared up to the exact sizes given:</p> + +<ul><li>2 posts, 3 in. square by 17 in.</li> +<li>2 posts, 3 in. square by 26 in.</li> +<li>2 rails, 7/8 by 8 by 82 in.</li> +<li>1 rail, 7/8 by 8 by 25 in.</li> +<li>1 end, 7/8 by 18 by 25 in.</li> +<li>1 piece, 7/8 by 9 by 24-1/2 in.</li></ul> + + +<p>The last piece on the list when sawed diagonal +makes the two slanting pieces at the head of the +couch. The corner braces are made from two +pieces of straight-grained oak, 2 by 4-1/2 by 4-1/2 in., +sawed on the diagonal, and cut as shown in the +enlarged plan section to make the four pieces.</p> + +<p>First be sure the legs are perfectly square, the +two short ones and the two long ones of equal length +respectively. Either chamfer or round the upper +ends as desired, chisel and plane the taper on the +lower ends. Lay out and cut all the tenons on the +rails—1 in. is the amount allowed at each end in +the stock dimensions given. Arrange the posts +and rails in the positions they are to occupy in the +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_34" id="Page_34">[Pg 34]</a></span> +finished couch. Number each tenon and the place its corresponding +mortise is to be cut in the post. Mark each mortise directly from the +tenon which is to fit into it, taking care to have all the rails an +equal distance from the floor. Bore and chisel out all mortises and see +that all the rails fit perfectly, before proceeding with the work.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Couch_Complete" +id="Couch_Complete"></a> +<img src="images/i-034.jpg" width="600" height="235" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Couch Complete</span> +</div> + +<p>The next step will be to fit in the slanting side pieces at the head of +the couch. These must be let into the long posts 1/2 in. and held also +by a dowel in the side rail. In order to get these pieces into place, +the mortise in the long post must be made 1/2 in. longer than the tenon +on the sloping + +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_35" id="Page_35">[Pg 35]</a></span> +side piece so the tenon may be first pushed +into the mortise and then the side clamped down +on the rail over the dowel. The whole couch should +fit together perfectly before gluing any of the parts.</p> + +<p>Glue the end parts together first. Hot glue will hold best if the room +and lumber are warm; if these cannot be had, use cold glue. After the +ends have set for at least 24 hours, glue in place the side rails and +slanting head pieces. Screw in place the corner braces. Be sure when +making these braces to have the grain running diagonally across the +corner, or the brace will be weak, also, be sure the sides are square +with the ends; this may be determined by measuring the diagonals to find +if they are equal.</p> + +<p>If it is decided to use frames for the cushions, then the following +material will be necessary:</p> + +<ul><li>2 pieces, 7/8 by 2 by 56 in.</li> +<li>2 pieces, 7/8 by 2 by 25 in.</li> +<li>4 pieces 7/8 by 2 by 21 in.</li></ul> + + +<p>This material may be of pine or poplar. These pieces are made into two +frames as shown in the drawing and held together with long screws or +nails. Fasten with glue and screw short blocks on the inside of the +couch rails for holding the two frames in place. Tack pieces of cheap +burlap across the frame and cover with ordinary black cambric. This will +give a strong, springy rest for the cushions.</p> + +<p>Should slats be used instead of frames for holding the cushions, then +the following list of material should be substituted for the frame +material list:</p> + +<ul><li>2 cleats, 7/8 by 2 by 56 in.</li> +<li>2 cleats, 7/8 by 2 by 25 in.</li> +<li>12 slats, 3/4 by 5 by 25 in.</li></ul> + + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_36" id="Page_36">[Pg 36]</a></span></p> +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Details_of_Mission_Couch" +id="Details_of_Mission_Couch"></a> +<img src="images/i-036.jpg" width="600" height="266" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Details of Mission Couch</span> +</div> + +<p>The materials listed may be of soft wood the same +as for the frame. The cleats are fastened to the inside +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_37" id="Page_37">[Pg 37]</a></span> +of the rails of the couch with screws, so the top +edge will be 2 in. lower than the top edge of the rails. +The slats are spaced evenly on these cleats.</p> + +<p>After the glue is all set, remove the clamps and +scrape off any glue that may be on the wood. If +this glue is not removed it will keep the stain from +entering the wood, which will show up when +finished in white spots.</p> + +<p>This couch may be stained in any of the shades +of brown or dark to harmonize with its lines of construction. +A water stain will penetrate the wood +best and after this is applied and thoroughly dried +the surface should be well sanded to remove the +roughness of the raised grain. Apply one coat of +thin shellac and when this is dry, put on two coats +of wax.</p> + +<p>In making up the cushions, use either hair or +elastic felt for the filling.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="ELECTRIC_SHADE_FOR_THE_DINING_ROOM" id="ELECTRIC_SHADE_FOR_THE_DINING_ROOM"></a>ELECTRIC SHADE FOR THE DINING ROOM</h2> + + +<p>The dining shade shown is constructed of wood +and glass. There will be needed the following:</p> + +<ul><li>8 pieces, 3/4 by 3/4 by 24 in., S-4-S, oak.</li> +<li>4 pieces, 3/4 by 3/4 by 4 in., S-4-S, oak.</li> +<li>4 pieces, 3/4 by 3/4 by 10-1/2 in., S-4-S, oak.</li> +<li>4 pieces, 3/8 by 3/4 by 23 in., S-4-S, oak.</li> +<li>8 pieces, 3/8 by 3/4 by 10 in., S-4-S, oak.</li> +<li>4 pieces, 3/8 by 3/4 by 9 in., S-4-S, oak.</li> +<li>1 piece, 3/4 by 8 by 8 in., S-4-S, oak.</li></ul> + + +<p>Begin work by shaping the ends of the longest +pieces as shown in the drawing. All the angles are +45 deg. Next lay out the cross-lap joints at the +corners so that two sets of horizontal frames shall +be formed 23 by 23 in. Cut four pieces to a length +of 3 in. each. Also shape up the "false" extensions +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_38" id="Page_38">[Pg 38]</a></span> +of these pieces which are to be fastened below the +lower frame at the corners. Since these are to be +cut from the pieces just specified, the easiest way is +to shape the end of each to the required angle and +then crosscut. Rabbet these pieces sufficient to allow +the art glass to set in on the back sides and +be fastened—about 1/4 in. will do—and put them +together with glue and brads.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Details_of_Shade" +id="Details_of_Shade"></a> +<img src="images/i-038.jpg" width="600" height="532" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Details of Shade</span> +</div> + +<p>Now make the top square in a similar manner, +except the rabbets. In this top square is to be fitted +the 3/4-in. board which is to hold the lights and to +which the chains are to be fastened.</p> + +<p>The sloping sides are next to be made. The sides +are to be built up separately, the corners being +lapped and glued after rabbeting the under arrises +sufficient to let the glass in. The four sides are +mitered together at their edges and reinforced by +covering the joint with copper. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_39" id="Page_39">[Pg 39]</a></span></p> + +<p>These sides are next mitered to the top and bottom +frames and made fast on the under sides with +copper strips, glue being used on the edges of the +wood.</p> + +<p>The shade shown had a mottled glass in which +greens predominated. The sizes and shapes of these +pieces of glass would better be determined after +the woodwork is finished.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Electric_Shade_Complete" +id="Electric_Shade_Complete"></a> +<img src="images/i-039.jpg" width="600" height="591" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Electric Shade Complete</span> +</div> + +<p>One manner of fastening the chains is clearly +shown in the photograph. Such a combination will +call for an extra piece of oak, 3/4 by 3-1/4 by 3-1/4 in. +finished stock.</p> + +<p>A good finish for this shade is obtained as follows: +Put on a coat of silver gray water stain. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_40" id="Page_40">[Pg 40]</a></span> +When this has dried, sand lightly with No. 00 sandpaper +and apply a coat of golden oak oil stain. Allow +this to dry after wiping the surplus off with a +cloth. Put on a coat of black paste filler and allow +to harden over night. When dry, sand lightly and +put on a coat of very thin shellac. Sand this lightly +when hard and put on a coat of wax. This is a +very dark finish relieved by high lights of lighter +brown and is known as Antwerp oak.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="HOW_TO_BEND_WOOD" id="HOW_TO_BEND_WOOD"></a>HOW TO BEND WOOD</h2> + + +<p>The process for making bent wood for furniture +parts is the same as for any other kind of bent-wood +work. The pieces should be made close to +the size, with only enough material left on them for +"cleaning up" after the bending has been done. The +pieces used for the bent work should be good, clean, +"live" lumber. Lumber dried on the stump will +not bend.</p> + +<p>A box must be made in which to steam the pieces +of wood to be bent. A design of a steaming box +is shown in the illustration. Such a box is made by +nailing four boards together into a square or rectangular +form, the boards having a length sufficient +to take in the length of the furniture parts to be +bent. Both ends of the finished box are squared up +and closed with a board cut to the size, using felt +or gunny sack in the joint to make it as tight as +possible. These ends can be nailed on, but it is +best to hold them with a bar of metal set against +each one. Nailing the ends a few times would +spoil the box for further use in steaming. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_41" id="Page_41">[Pg 41]</a></span></p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 314px;"><a name="Steaming_Box" +id="Steaming_Box"></a> +<img src="images/i-041.jpg" width="314" height="185" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">STEAMING BOX</span> +</div> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 314px;"><a name="Hose_Attached_to_Teakettle" +id="Hose_Attached_to_Teakettle"></a> +<img src="images/i-041a.jpg" width="314" height="212" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">HOSE ATTACHED TO TEAKETTLE.</span> +</div> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 312px;"><a name="Form_Blocks" +id="Form_Blocks"></a> +<img src="images/i-041b.jpg" width="312" height="179" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">FORM BLOCKS</span> +</div><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_42" id="Page_42">[Pg 42]</a></span></p> + +<p>A good teakettle will serve the purpose for a steam generator. A hose is +attached to the spout of the teakettle, as shown in the illustration, +and to the steaming box in a like manner. The steaming box should be +provided with a short piece of gas pipe turned into a hole bored into +one of the sides used for the top on which to attach the hose. A small +hole should be bored into one side of one end of the steaming box, and +this end should be arranged a trifle lower than the other end. The hole +will permit the water of condensation to escape. Steam should not escape +from the box when a charge of wood is being softened. Steam which +escapes from the box in the form of vapor has done no work whatever, and +is just so much waste of fuel. In order to give up its heat to the wood, +the steam must condense and come away from the box as water. Therefore, +in steaming a charge of pieces in the box, never crowd the teakettle so +hard that the steam escapes around the heads of the box or through any +other joints. The steam should be supplied to the box just as fast as it +condenses, and no faster. When the pieces are placed in the box they +should be so arranged that the steam can find ready access to all sides +of each piece.</p> + +<p>The curve or bend of the piece to be made must be marked out on a wide +board or on the floor. Nail down several blocks of wood or pieces cut +out like brackets on the board or floor against the drawing, as shown in +the illustration. The wood is sprung between these blocks or forms after +it has been softened by steam. When taking the steamed pieces from the +box do not lose any time in securing +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_43" id="Page_43">[Pg 43]</a></span> +them to the forms. Do not take out more than one piece at a time, as it +must be bent to the forms immediately after taking it from the hot +steam. The time of the steaming will vary with the size of the pieces. +Small strips may be steamed in 15 or 20 minutes, while large ones may +require several hours to become soft enough to bend. The pieces must be +left in the forms until they are thoroughly dry.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="A_SMOKING_STAND" id="A_SMOKING_STAND"></a>A SMOKING STAND</h2> + + +<p>When making the smoking stand shown in the +accompanying photograph, use quarter-sawed oak, +if possible, as this wood is the most suitable for +finishing in the different mission stains. This little +piece of furniture is very attractive, easy to construct, +and is an article that a smoker would appreciate.</p> + +<p>If the stock is purchased finished and sandpapered, +it will save much of the hard work. The material +needed is as follows:</p> + +<ul><li>One piece, 7/8 by 12 in. by 9 ft. long, for the legs.</li> +<li>One piece, 7/8 by 10 in. by 4 ft. long, for the top.</li> +<li>One piece, 7/8 by 8 in. by 1 ft. long, for the shelves.</li> +<li>One piece, 1/2 by 2 in. by 6 ft. long, for the pipe rack.</li></ul> + + +<p>The legs can be made first. Cut four pieces off the +12-in. board, each exactly 25 in. long, and lay each one +out with a pair of compasses as shown in the detail +drawing at Fig. 1. With a circle or keyhole saw cut +out the piece, then shave out the saw marks and sandpaper +smooth.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Smoking_Stand_Details" +id="Smoking_Stand_Details"></a> +<img src="images/i-044.jpg" width="600" height="497" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Smoking Stand Details</span> +</div> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 499px;"><a name="Finished_Smoking_Stand" +id="Finished_Smoking_Stand"></a> +<img src="images/i-045.jpg" width="499" height="600" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Finished Smoking Stand</span> +</div> + +<p>Next take the 8-in. board and make the shelves. Set +a bevel protractor at a 45-deg. angle, lay out the pieces +as shown in Fig. 5, and cut them out with a saw. +Eight pieces are cut out as shown in Fig. 4. These +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_44" id="Page_44">[Pg 44]</a></span> +pieces can be cut out of the scraps left from cutting +the legs and shelves. Cut them so that the grain runs +the long way. Place two of these braces on the bench +with the beveled ends toward each other, but with a +piece of 7/8-in. stock between them, and the other two +beveled ends resting against a straightedge. Fasten +them to the bench with a couple of nails, leaving the +heads sticking up so that you can pull them later with +a claw hammer. Remove the straightedge and slide +the piece that is between the braces along until it projects +4 or 5 in. from the side formed by the straightedge. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_45" id="Page_45">[Pg 45]</a></span> +Then place two more braces in the corners +formed by this piece, put two 7/8-in. pieces between the +two braces that are fastened, and the two that are +loose, so that each brace will be in its proper place. +Fasten the last two the same as the first pair. Then +remove all the pieces from between the braces and +place the tops of the legs in their stead. These should +be fastened to the braces with 1-in. screws of small +diameter, put in at an angle. Bore a hole in straight +for about 1/4-in. with a 1/4-in. bit for each screw, and +then run a gimlet at an angle into the leg. After you +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_46" id="Page_46">[Pg 46]</a></span> +have the legs fastened to the first set of braces, measure +up from the bench 10 in. and put in another set, +being careful to get them all the same distance from +the bench, as the inner corners of the shelves rest on +these braces. Now pull out the nails and set the stand +on its feet.</p> + +<p>Next put in the shelves. Place the inner corner of +one on one of the braces, and fasten it there with a +screw put through the brace from the bottom. Now +fasten a clamp on each leg at the ends of the shelf +in such a manner as to form a support on the top side +of the shelf. Then put four screws through the shelf +from the bottom into the legs. Repeat the operation +on each shelf, being careful to get them all the same +height. Four pieces like Fig. 3 should now be made. +These pieces will have to be fitted in place as they +should slant outward so that it will be easy to put +articles through the holes. The holes should be about +5/8-in. diameter.</p> + +<p>The top can be made by cutting off two pieces from +the 10-in. board, each 20 in. long, and fastening them +together with dowels. Smooth the ends and be sure +that the boards match evenly. It makes a better job +to glue the top together, in addition to the dowels, and, +if you do this, it would be better to make the top first. +Then it will have time to dry before you are ready to +use it. In putting on the top, care should be taken to +get each of the corners an equal distance from the +legs. Then a screw may be put up through each one +of the braces and two or three through each leg into +the top. Now smooth all rough and uneven places +with fine sandpaper and apply the finish. Secure +some metal matchsafes and scratchers, fasten on as +shown in the photograph, and the stand is complete. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_47" id="Page_47">[Pg 47]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="A_CHINA_CLOSET" id="A_CHINA_CLOSET"></a>A CHINA CLOSET</h2> + + +<p>This beautiful piece of mission furniture can be +made by anyone who has a few good tools and +knows how to use them. The cost is very moderate +and if you are convenient to a mill a great amount +of labor can be saved by ordering the pieces ready +cut to length, squared, and sanded. Quarter-sawed +oak should be used and the material needed will +be as follows:</p> + +<ul><li>4 posts, 2 by 2 by 54 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>2 top and bottom boards, 3/4 by 15-3/4 by 39-1/2 in., S-1-S.</li> +<li>2 shelves, 3/4 by 15-1/2 by 38 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>2 lower end braces, 3/4 by 5 by 15 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>2 upper end braces, 3/4 by 4-1/4 by 15 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>1 lower front board, 3/4 by 3 by 40 in., S-1-S.</li> +<li>1 upper front board, 3/4 by 2-1/4 by 40 in., S-1-S.</li> +<li>4 door frames, 3/4 by 1-3/4 by 43-1/2 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>4 door frames, 3/4 by 2 by 19 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>4 upright end pieces, 3/4 by 1-1/2 by 39-1/2 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>5 back pieces, 1/2 by 8 by 46-1/2 in., S-1-S.</li> +<li>2 cleats, 1 by 1 by 37-3/4 in., soft wood.</li> +<li>4 cleats, 1 by 1 by 12-3/4 in., soft wood.</li> +<li>4 blocks, 1/2 by 1 by 1-1/2 in.</li></ul> + + +<p>First be sure the posts are perfectly square and of +equal length. Either chamfer or round the upper +ends as desired. The mortises can be laid out and +cut, or they can be left until the tenons are all made +and then marked and cut directly from each tenon.</p> + +<p>The top and bottom boards should have the +corners cut to clear the posts as shown in the drawing. +The top board should be finished on both +sides and the bottom one on the upper side only and +be sure to get the best side up.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_48" id="Page_48">[Pg 48]</a></span></p> +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Details_of_China_Closet" +id="Details_of_China_Closet"></a> +<img src="images/i-048.jpg" width="600" height="404" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Details of China Closet</span> +</div> + +<p>Cut the tenons on the front boards back 1/4 in. +from the face as shown in the end view. The boards +should be finished on the outside sides and edges. +The end pieces are fitted and finished in a similar +manner except that the inside edge is rabbeted for +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_49" id="Page_49">[Pg 49]</a></span> +the glass as shown. The side pieces are also rabbeted +for the glass and the posts have grooves 1/2 in. +deep cut in them to hold these side pieces. They +are glued in place and this can be done after the +frame is put together.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 471px;"><a name="China_Closet_Complete" +id="China_Closet_Complete"></a> +<img src="images/i-049.jpg" width="471" height="600" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">China Closet Complete</span> +</div> + +<p>The two shelves are finished on both sides and the +front edges. The doors are fitted in the usual manner +by a tenon and mortise joint at the ends. They +are rabbeted on the inside for the glass and are +finished on all sides. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_50" id="Page_50">[Pg 50]</a></span></p> + +<p>Before gluing any of the parts together, see that they all fit and go +together perfectly square. The posts, side, and front pieces should be +glued and assembled, then the top and bottom boards put in place to hold +the frame square when the clamps are put on. Leave dry for about 24 +hours, then scrape all the surplus glue from about the joints as the +finish will not take when there is any glue. Fasten the top and bottom +boards to the frame by means of screws through cleats as shown in the +drawing. The backing is put on and finished on the front side. A mirror +can be put in the back without much trouble, if it is desired. The +shelves should be put in place and held at the back by screws through +the backing and at the front by two small blocks on the posts as shown.</p> + +<p>After the closet is all assembled it should be thoroughly gone over with +fine sandpaper before any finish is applied. It can be finished in any +one of the many mission stains which are supplied by the trade for this +purpose.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="A_LEATHER-COVERED_FOOTSTOOL" id="A_LEATHER-COVERED_FOOTSTOOL"></a>A LEATHER-COVERED FOOTSTOOL</h2> + + +<p>The illustration shows a very handy footstool in +mission style. The following list of materials will +be needed:</p> + +<ul><li>4 oak posts, 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 12 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>2 sides, 3/4 by 3 by 12 in., soft wood.</li> +<li>2 ends, 3/4 by 3 by 8 in., soft wood.</li> +<li>1 bottom, 3/4 by 8 by 12 in., soft wood.</li> +<li>1 small box of 8 oz. tacks</li> +<li>2-1/2 doz. ornamental head nails.</li> +<li>1 piece of dark leather, 16 by 20 in.</li> +<li>1/2 lb. hair and a small portion of mission stain.</li></ul> + + +<p>The posts are the only parts made of quarter-sawed +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_51" id="Page_51">[Pg 51]</a></span> +oak, the other parts, being covered with +leather, can be made of any kind of soft wood. +Chamfer the top end of each post, and taper the +lower ends as shown in detail. When this is done +the mortises can be cut for the sides as shown in the +post detail. When cutting the mortises and tenons +take care to make them fit perfectly, as there is +nothing to brace the legs at the bottom. The strength +of the stool depends upon the joints. Make the surface +of the posts smooth by first using No. 1 sandpaper, +then finishing with No. 00.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Footstool_Leather_Covered" +id="Footstool_Leather_Covered"></a> +<img src="images/i-051.jpg" width="600" height="470" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Footstool Leather Covered</span> +</div> + +<p>The parts are now assembled. First clamp the +ends together, using plenty of glue on the joints, +and drive some small nails on the inside of the posts +through the tenon ends. When the glue has set, the +remaining sides can be put together the same as the +ends. Fit the bottom on the inside about 1 in. from +the top. This can be made fast by driving nails +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_52" id="Page_52">[Pg 52]</a></span> +through the sides and ends of the board. The finishing +is done by putting on the mission stain as the directions +state on the can, then wax the surface to +get a dull gloss.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Details_of_Footstool" +id="Details_of_Footstool"></a> +<img src="images/i-052.jpg" width="600" height="287" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Details of Footstool</span> +</div> + +<p>The leather is now put on. Notch out the corners to fit around the +posts, but do not cut the ends off. Lap them under the cover. Before +nailing on the cover fix the hair evenly over the top, about 6 in. deep. +Draw the leather over the hair and fasten the edges with the 8-oz. +tacks. The ornamental nails are driven in last, as shown in the drawing, +to make a good appearance.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="ARTS-CRAFTS_MANTEL_CLOCK" id="ARTS-CRAFTS_MANTEL_CLOCK"></a>ARTS-CRAFTS MANTEL CLOCK</h2> + + +<p>The clock shown in the illustration was designed +especially for rooms furnished in mission style. The +clock, however, may be made of mahogany or other +wood to match the furniture in any room where it is +to be placed. If the mission effect is desired, an oxidized +or copper sash should be used. Movements +can be bought at the salesroom of a clock company. +A movement should be selected that is wide enough +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_53" id="Page_53">[Pg 53]</a></span> +from the front to the back to allow the clock case to +be made sufficiently deep for standing without being +easily upset.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Mantel_Clock" +id="Mantel_Clock"></a> +<img src="images/i-053.jpg" width="600" height="390" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Mantel Clock with Wood and Copper Front</span> +</div> + +<p>Quarter-sawed white oak is the best material for +this clock, but any other wood which works easily +and takes a stain well may be used. Two pieces, +3/8 in. thick, 6-1/2 in. wide, and 8-1/2 in. long, will be +needed for the front and back. One piece, 5 in. wide, +6 in. long, and with a thickness sufficient for the +clock movement, is needed for the middle part. The +thickness of this piece depends on the movement +secured.</p> + +<p>After the front and back pieces are finished, and +a piece of hammered copper screwed on the front +as shown in the drawing, the middle piece must be +made just thick enough to make the whole distance +from the front of the copper to the back of the clock +equal to the depth of the movement. Plane one edge +on both front and back pieces. Lay out the design +and the centers for the circular holes from this +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_54" id="Page_54">[Pg 54]</a></span> +planed edge. Use a plane and chisel to cut the outside +design. The hole can be bored out with an expansive +bit, or sawed out with a scroll saw, and filed +perfectly round with a half-round wood file. The +bit will give the best results. If the bit is used, bore +holes in a piece of scrap wood until the exact size is +found.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Details_of_Mantel_Clock" +id="Details_of_Mantel_Clock"></a> +<img src="images/i-054.jpg" width="600" height="358" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Details of Mantel Clock</span> +</div> + +<p>The outside design of the piece of copper is made to correspond to the +design of the clock. The circular hole in the copper can be cut with the +expansive bit by first punching a hole in the center to receive the spur +of the bit, placing on a block of wood and boring through a little way. +The spur on the cutter will cut out the copper. Fasten the copper to the +front with copper nails or round-headed screws.</p> + +<p>If good glue can be had, the three pieces of wood may be glued together. +If the glue cannot be relied upon, put in two flat-headed screws from +the back.</p> + +<p>The clock can be finished with a dark stain and +waxed, or, as it is small, it can be easily fumed. If +stain is used, stain and wax the pieces before putting +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_55" id="Page_55">[Pg 55]</a></span> +them together. The fuming process is more +easily done after the clock is assembled. Secure a +bucket, a peck measure, or any receptacle large +enough, when inverted, to put over the clock. Pour +about 2 oz. of strong ammonia into a saucer or small +pan. Support the clock above the saucer and cover +both with the inverted bucket. Allow it to stand for +three or four days—the longer it stands the darker +the fumed finish will be. Finish with two coats of +bleached wax. Do not use ordinary uncolored wax, +as it will show in the unfilled pores of the wood. The +works of the clock should not be in the frame while +fuming.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="A_MUSIC_STAND" id="A_MUSIC_STAND"></a>A MUSIC STAND</h2> + + +<p>The attractive and useful piece of mission furniture +shown in the accompanying illustration is made of +quarter-sawed oak. Considerable labor can be saved +in its construction if the stock is ordered from the mill +ready cut to length, squared and sanded. The stock +list consists of the following pieces:</p> + +<ul><li>1 top, 3/4 by 16 by 20 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>1 shelf, 3/4 by 11-1/2 by 15 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>1 shelf, 3/4 by 12 by 15 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>1 shelf, 3/4 by 14-1/2 by 15 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>1 shelf, 3/4 by 16 by 15 in., S-1-S.</li> +<li>4 legs, 3/4 by 5 by 41 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>2 lower crosspieces, 3/4 by 3 by 9 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>2 upper crosspieces, 3/4 by 2 by 9 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>4 end slats, 5/8 by 2 by 34 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>20 R.H. screws, 2 in. long.</li></ul> + + +<p>The four shelves and the top are so wide that it will +be necessary to make them from two or more pieces +glued together. The top should have a 1/4-in. bevel +cut around the upper edge as shown in the drawing.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 572px;"><a name="Details_of_Music_Stand" +id="Details_of_Music_Stand"></a> +<img src="images/i-056.jpg" width="572" height="600" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Details of Music Stand</span> +</div> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_57" id="Page_57">[Pg 57]</a></span></p> +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 351px;"><a name="Music_Stand_Complete" +id="Music_Stand_Complete"></a> +<img src="images/i-057.jpg" width="351" height="600" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Music Stand Complete</span> +</div> + +<p>The curve of the legs can be cut with a bracket saw +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_56" id="Page_56">[Pg 56]</a></span> +or a drawknife, care being taken to get the edges +square and smooth. The four crosspieces are fastened +to the legs by means of tenons and mortises. The end +slats are joined to the crosspieces in the same manner. +The legs can be assembled in pairs with the slats and +crosspieces in place. They can be glued in this position, +and when dry they should be carefully gone +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_58" id="Page_58">[Pg 58]</a></span> + +over with fine sandpaper to remove all rough spots. +The shelves can now be put in place. They should +be fastened to the legs with round-headed screws. +The top is also fastened on with screws. When applying +the finish, remove the top board and the +shelves and finish them separately. The stand can +be finished in any one of the many mission stains +supplied by the trade for this purpose.</p> + +<p>This handsome piece of furniture can be used as a +magazine stand as well as a music stand, if desired, +and, if it is made and finished well, it will prove an +ornament to any home.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="MAKING_SCREWS_HOLD_IN_THE_END" id="MAKING_SCREWS_HOLD_IN_THE_END"></a> +MAKING SCREWS HOLD IN THE END +GRAIN OF WOOD</h2> + + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 500px;"><a name="Making_Screws_Hold" +id="Making_Screws_Hold"></a> +<img src="images/i-058.jpg" width="500" height="281" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">MAKING SCREWS HOLD IN END GRAIN</span> +</div> + +<p>It is often necessary to fasten one piece of wood to the end of another +by means of screws. Wood being a fibrous material, it can be readily +understood that when a screw having sharp threads is put in the end +grain parallel to these fibers the threads cut them in such a way that, +when an extra strain is put upon the parts, the screw pulls out, +bringing with it the severed fibers. The accompanying sketch shows how +this difficulty may be overcome, and at the same time make the screw +hold firmly. A hole is bored and a dowel, preferably +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_59" id="Page_59">[Pg 59]</a></span> +of hardwood, glued in it, the grain at right angles +to that of the piece.</p> + +<p>The size of the dowel, and its location, can be determined by the +diameter and the length of the screw. The dowel need not extend all the +way through the piece, but should be put in from the surface where the +grain of the dowel will be least objectionable.</p> + +<p>When putting screws in hard wood much labor will be saved by applying +soap to the threads.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="A_WALL_CASE_WITH_A_MIRROR_DOOR" id="A_WALL_CASE_WITH_A_MIRROR_DOOR"> +</a>A WALL CASE WITH A MIRROR DOOR</h2> + + +<p>The wall case shown in the accompanying picture +will serve well as a medicine case. Having a paneled +door in which is set a mirror, it serves equally well as +a shaving case. It is best made of some hard wood, +though a soft wood such as pine or yellow poplar will +work up easier and look well finished with three or +four coats of white enamel paint.</p> + +<p>There will be needed the following pieces:</p> + +<ul><li>2 sides, 5/8 by 6 by 32-1/2 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>1 top and 1 bottom, 5/8 by 6 by 18 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>1 top of back, 1/2 by 4 by 16-1/4 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>1 bottom of back, 1/2 by 3 by 16-1/4 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>1 shelf, 5/8 by 5 by 16 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>1 back, 1/4 by 16 by 21 in., S-2-S.</li></ul> + + +<p>DOOR</p> + +<ul><li>2 stiles, 5/8 by 3 by 20-1/2 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>1 top rail, 5/8 by 2 by 11 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>1 bottom rail, 5/8 by 4 by 11 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>1 backing for door, 3/16 by 10 by 15 in., S-2-S.</li></ul> + + +<p>First shape the ends of the two side pieces as shown +in the drawing. Next square the top and bottom +pieces of the case to size, and lay out and cut the tenons +on the ends. Lay out and cut the mortises in the +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_60" id="Page_60">[Pg 60]</a></span> +side pieces, also the groove for the shelf, having first +squared the shelf to size. Cut and shape the top and +bottom pieces of the back as shown. Cut the rebates +in the side pieces into which these pieces are to rest +their ends. Cut the rebate for the back. Thoroughly +scrape and sandpaper these parts and assemble them. +Cut and fit the back in place.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 543px;"><a name="Wall_Case_Details" +id="Wall_Case_Details"></a> +<img src="images/i-060.jpg" width="543" height="600" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Wall Case Details</span> +</div> + +<p>The door is to be made next. Plan the different +parts of the door so that the edges may be planed to +fit the opening; that is, make the door a good quarter +larger at top and bottom than the opening. In cutting +the rebate the easiest way is to use a rabbeting plane +and cut the full length of the pieces. By using a tenon +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_61" id="Page_61">[Pg 61]</a></span> +on the rails in which one shoulder is as much longer +than the other as the rebate is deep there is no resulting +groove showing at the corner.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 325px;"><a name="Case_with_Mirror_Door" +id="Case_with_Mirror_Door"></a> +<img src="images/i-061.jpg" width="325" height="600" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Case with Mirror Door</span> +</div> + +<p>The wood should be finished before the glass is set, +at least, it should be filled, if of hard wood, and one +coat of paint put on, if of soft wood which is to be +enameled.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_62" id="Page_62">[Pg 62]</a></span></p> + +<p>In setting the glass, place a thin cushion of putty +between the rebate and the glass and another thin +cushion between the glass and the fillet of wood or the +backing which is to protect the back of the glass.</p> + +<p>Fit the door, and then put on the hinges and lock. +If desired, the tenons may be made keyed as shown +in the photograph instead of through as shown in the +drawing.</p> + +<p>To finish the case, if of oak, apply a coat of light +paste filler, the directions being on the filler can. Next +put on a coat of white shellac. When this has hardened +apply two coats of some good varnish. Allow +time for each coat to harden and rub the first coats +with haircloth or curled hair, and the last with pulverized +pumice and raw linseed oil or crude oil.</p> + +<p>If the wood is soft and an enamel white is desired, +the enamel is applied not unlike paint. The directions +will be found on the cans in which the paint is +purchased.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="A_SIDE_CHAIR" id="A_SIDE_CHAIR"></a>A SIDE CHAIR</h2> + + +<p>A side chair of simple design and construction is +here given. The great difficulty with most chair designs +is that the back is generally designed narrower +than the front, thus necessitating the rails entering +the posts or legs at angles. To the amateur this is +quite confusing. The chair illustrated is the same +in width, both back and front, so that the shoulders +of all the rails are at right angles to the sides. The +back of the chair is straight, thus simplifying the +design still more. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_63" id="Page_63">[Pg 63]</a></span></p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 371px;"><a name="Side_Chair_Complete" +id="Side_Chair_Complete"></a> +<img src="images/i-063.jpg" width="371" height="600" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Side Chair Complete</span> +</div> + +<p>Another thing which is confusing to the beginner +in his efforts to lay out the mortises is the irregular +placing of the rails. It will be noted that in this +design the rails of side, front and back are on the +same level.</p> + +<p>Plain sawed red oak will be appropriate for this +piece. Have the pieces mill-planed and sandpapered +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_64" id="Page_64">[Pg 64]</a></span> +on four sides to size, allowing 1/2 in. extra to the +lengths for squaring up the ends.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Details_of_Side_Chair" +id="Details_of_Side_Chair"></a> +<img src="images/i-064.jpg" width="600" height="444" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Details of Side Chair</span> +</div> + +<p>There will be needed the following:</p> + +<ul><li>4 rails, 7/8 by 2 by 17-1/2 in.</li> +<li>4 rails, 3/4 by 2 by 17-1/2 in.</li> +<li>2 front posts, 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 19 in.</li> +<li>2 rear posts, 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 37-1/2 in.</li> +<li>1 back, 3/4 by 9-3/4 by 17-1/2 in.</li> +<li>2 cleats, 3/8 by 1 by 16 in.</li> +<li>4 slats, 3/8 by 2 by 16-1/2 in.</li></ul> + + +<p>Begin work by cutting the posts to the lengths indicated +in the drawing. The lower ends should be +chamfered slightly to prevent their splintering from +usage. The top ends are cut to an angle of 45 deg., +the slope beginning 1/2 in. below the top. Lay out +and cut the mortises. To do this, lay off the measurements +on one of the posts, then place all four +side by side on the bench, with the face marks up. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_65" id="Page_65">[Pg 65]</a></span> +Even the ends with the try-square and then carry +the measurements just made across all of them, using +the try-square. The rails ought to be shouldered on +all four sides. Three-eighths inch is a good thickness +for the tenons. The width may be 1-1/4 in. and +the length 1 in.</p> + +<p>Place the rails side by side on the bench with +the joint-edges up and the ends evened. Measure +off the desired length on one of them and carry the +lines across all of them to indicate the location of +the shoulder lines. Separate the pieces and square +these lines entirely around all of the sides of each +piece. With the tenon saw rip and cross cut to these +lines.</p> + +<p>The back, it will be noted, is set on a slant to add +comfort. Thoroughly clean all the parts and assemble +them, using good hot glue. Put the back +together first, then the front. After these have dried, +put the side rails in place.</p> + +<p>Cut and fit the two cleats—one to the front rail +and one to the rear rail. Keep them even with the +lower edge of the rail so as to form a slight recess +at the top when the slats are in place. This is to +keep the cushion from sliding off. The slats need +not be "let into" the cleats but merely fastened to +their top edges. The cushion may be made of +Spanish roan skin and should be filled with elastic +felt.</p> + +<p>In the chair shown, the joints are reinforced by +the addition of lag screws. If the glue is good and +the joints well fitted, these are not necessary. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_66" id="Page_66">[Pg 66]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="AN_ARM_CHAIR" id="AN_ARM_CHAIR"></a>AN ARM CHAIR</h2> + + +<p>The arm chair here described and illustrated is intended +to be one of the set of diners made after the +design of the side chair described on another page. +The same general directions for making the side +chair apply equally to the arm chair.</p> + +<p>The stock given in the following list should be +purchased surfaced on four sides and well sandpapered:</p> + +<ul><li>2 rear posts, 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 38 in.</li> +<li>2 front posts, 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 26-1/2 in.</li> +<li>9 rails, 7/8 by 2 by 19-1/2 in.</li> +<li>1 rail, 7/8 by 1-1/2 by 19-1/2 in.</li> +<li>3 slats, 1/2 by 2 by 12-1/2 in.</li> +<li>2 arms, 7/8 by 4-1/2 by 20-1/2 in.</li> +<li>2 brackets, 7/8 by 2-1/4 by 2-1/2 in.</li> +<li>2 cleats, 3/8 by 1 by 19 in.</li> +<li>4 slats, 3/8 by 2 by 19 in.</li></ul> + + +<p>Prepare the posts first by cutting them to the +lengths shown in the drawing. In the photograph +the front posts have their tops cut off square and the +arms fastened to them by means of lag screws. A +better way from a mechanical point of view would +be to shoulder the top ends on the four sides, cut +through-mortises in the arms and insert these tenoned +posts into these mortises, pinning the arm to +the post by means of small dowels in the edge of the +post and through the tenon.</p> + +<p>The brackets under the arms are to be fastened to +the posts and arms by means of concealed dowels +and glue of good quality.</p> + +<p>All of the rails should be tenoned into the posts +thoroughly, even if the lag screw fastenings are used. +If the lag screws are used, the tenons may be what +are known as stubb tenons—tenons of short length. +Good hot glue should be used in either case. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_67" id="Page_67">[Pg 67]</a></span></p> + +<p>The shape of the arms is indicated in the drawing. +They are fastened to the rear posts by means of +dowels and glue.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 453px;"><a name="Arm_Chair_Complete" +id="Arm_Chair_Complete"></a> +<img src="images/i-067.jpg" width="453" height="600" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Arm Chair Complete</span> +</div> + +<p>The slats, or verticals, of the back should not have +their ends tenoned but should have the mortises in +the rails cut sufficiently large to "let in" the whole +end of each. This is much easier and more likely to +result in a satisfactory fit than to shoulder them. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_68" id="Page_68">[Pg 68]</a></span> +Any unevenness in the lengths of the respective slats +will not affect the fitting of the joints by this latter +method.</p> + +<p>The tops of the rear posts in this chair, as in the +side chair, are cut to angles of 45 deg., beginning the +slope at lines marked 1/2 in. from the tops.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Details_of_Chair" +id="Details_of_Chair"></a> +<img src="images/i-068.jpg" width="600" height="467" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Details of Chair</span> +</div> + +<p>The bottom is made up of 2-in. slats fitted between +the front and back rails and fastened to cleats which +have been previously fastened to the insides of the +front and back rails. Keep these cleats low enough +on the rails so that the top surfaces of the slats +shall rest somewhat below the top edges of the rails. +Cushions, such as the one shown, can be purchased +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_69" id="Page_69">[Pg 69]</a></span> +ready made or they can be easily made by the +amateur.</p> + +<p>A good finish for this chair and its mates is obtained as follows: Apply +one coat of brown Flemish water stain. This stain in the original +package is very dark in tone and unless an almost black finish is +wanted, it should be lightened by the addition of one-half or two-thirds +water. Apply with a brush or sponge and allow to dry over night. When +dry, sandpaper lightly with fine or worn sandpaper to remove the raised +grain caused by the water of the stain. Put on a very thin coat of +shellac. This is to prevent the "high lights" in close-grained woods +from being discolored by the stain in the filler which is to follow. The +shellac being very thin does not fill the pores of the wood perceptibly. +Next, sand the shellac coat lightly when it has hardened. Apply a coat +of paste filler colored considerably darker than the stain to the tone +desired for the open grain. If the filler is well stirred and properly +applied, one coat ought to be sufficient. If it does not fill the pores +satisfactorily, apply another coat when the first has had time to +harden. Vandyke brown is used to color the filler, if none but natural +color is to be had. On the hardened filler apply a thin coat of shellac. +On this apply several coats of wax. The directions for waxing will be +found upon the cans in which the wax comes. + +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_70" id="Page_70">[Pg 70]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="A_BOOKCASE" id="A_BOOKCASE"></a>A BOOKCASE</h2> + + +<p>This beautiful piece of mission furniture can be made at a very moderate +cost by anyone who has a slight knowledge of tools. Considerable labor +can be saved by ordering the material from the mill ready cut to size, +dressed and sanded. Quarter-sawed oak is the best wood to use and it is +comparatively easy to obtain. Plain-sawed oak looks well, but is more +liable to warp than the quarter-sawed and this is quite an element in +pieces as wide as the ones used. For the complete bookcase the following +material will be needed:</p> + +<ul><li>1 top, 3/4 by 15 by 31-1/4 in., hard wood, S-1-S.</li> +<li>1 top back board, 3/4 by 4 by 30-1/4 in., hard wood, S-1-S.</li> +<li>2 sides, 3/4 by 14 by 50 in., hard wood, S-1-S.</li> +<li>1 bottom, 3/4 by 14 by 28-3/4 in., hard wood, S-1-S.</li> +<li>1 bottom rail, 3/4 by 4 by 28-3/4 in., hard wood, S-1-S.</li> +<li>1 center piece, 3/4 by 2 by 45-3/4 in., hard wood, S-2-S.</li> +<li>4 door sides, 3/4 by 1-1/2 by 45-1/4 in., hard wood, S-2-S.</li> +<li>4 door ends, 3/4 by 1-1/2 by 14 in., hard wood, S-2-S.</li> +<li>4 pieces door lattice, 1/2 by 1/2 by 12-1/2 in., hard wood.</li> +<li>4 pieces door lattice, 1/2 by 1/2 by 7 in., hard wood.</li> +<li>2 bottom cleats, 1-1/4 by 1-1/4 by 13 in., soft wood.</li> +<li>2 top cleats, 1 by 1 by 12-1/2 in., soft wood.</li> +<li>3 shelves, 1/2 by 12 by 28-1/2 in., soft wood.</li> +<li>12 pieces backing, 3/8 by 4 by 29-3/4 in., soft wood.</li> +<li>4 hinges.</li> +<li>2 door handles.</li></ul> + + +<p>Begin with the sides by cutting them so they will +pair up all right. The front edges are rounded while +the back edges are rabbeted on the inside as deep as +the backing to be used. The bottoms are cut as +shown in the sketch. Holes about 1/2 in. deep should +be bored on the inside at the proper places for the +wooden pegs which hold up the shelves.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 387px;"><a name="Completed_Bookcase" +id="Completed_Bookcase"></a> +<img src="images/i-071.jpg" width="387" height="600" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Completed Bookcase.</span> +</div> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_71" id="Page_71">[Pg 71]</a></span></p> +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 568px;"><a name="Details_of_Bookcase" +id="Details_of_Bookcase"></a> +<img src="images/i-072.jpg" width="568" height="600" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Details of Bookcase</span> +</div> + +<p>The top and bottom boards should have the front +edges rounded and sanded the same as the sides. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_72" id="Page_72">[Pg 72]</a></span> + +The top board is sanded on one side only and care +should be taken to get the best side up.</p> + +<p>Now cut and fit the top back board. This is fastened +to the top by means of screws. Screw two +cleats to each of the sides as shown and by running +screws through these into the top and bottom boards +the frame is completed. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_73" id="Page_73">[Pg 73]</a></span></p> + +<p>The backing which can be made of some cheap +lumber is now put on. Next put in the center upright +piece between the doors by means of a tenon +and mortise at the top and nail at the bottom. The +front edge should be rounded and the edge and sides +sanded. Cut and fit the bottom rail as shown. It is +fastened to the frame by means of cleats on the back +side.</p> + +<p>The doors are put together by means of a tenon +and mortise. They should be rabbeted for the lattice +work and the glass. This lattice work can be omitted +and leaded glass put in its place which is very +becoming to this kind of work.</p> + +<p>When the case is completed it must be carefully +gone over with sandpaper before any finish is applied.</p> + +<p>A mission stain is suitable for work of this kind, +but it can also be finished in "golden oak" which is +done in the following manner: First put on a golden +oak stain and after it has dried for about 2 hours, +apply the filler. Let this dry about 10 minutes then +rub off with an old rag. Then go over the case again +with some very fine sandpaper and after seeing that +all parts are free from dust and dirt the varnish can +be applied. Three coats of varnish will give a beautiful +glossy finish.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="A_LAMP_STAND" id="A_LAMP_STAND"></a>A LAMP STAND</h2> + + +<p>A mission table lamp stand for those who use +electric lights is shown in the accompanying illustration. +It is suitable for either the office or the home +and is very simple in design and construction. The +stock should be quarter-sawed oak and it can be +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_74" id="Page_74">[Pg 74]</a></span> +ordered from the mill ready cut to length, squared +and sanded. The following pieces will be needed:</p> + +<ul><li>1 post, 1-1/2 in. sq. by 23 in.</li> +<li>1 arm, 1-/8 by 3/4 by 13-1/2 in.</li> +<li>1 block, 3/4 in. thick by 6 in. square.</li> +<li>1 block, 1 in. thick by 9 in. square.</li></ul> + + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 469px;"><a name="Details_of_Lamp_Stand" +id="Details_of_Lamp_Stand"></a> +<img src="images/i-074.jpg" width="469" height="600" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Details of Lamp Stand</span> +</div> + +<p>Square up the base blocks and fasten them together +with screws as shown in the detail sketch. A +mortise, 1 in. square, is cut in the center of the blocks +for the center post.. Lead weights, covered with felt, +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_75" id="Page_75">[Pg 75]</a></span> +should be attached to the bottom, as shown. The +post has a tenon cut on one end to fit the base, and a +mortise cut in the other for the arm. Holes are +bored in the arm from the ends for the wires. They +can be plugged after the wires are in place. A hole +is also bored in the top of the center post to connect +with the holes in the arm for the lead wire.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 518px;"><a name="Electric_Lamp_Stand_Complete" +id="Electric_Lamp_Stand_Complete"></a> +<img src="images/i-075.jpg" width="518" height="600" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Electric Lamp Stand Complete</span> +</div> + +<p>It is best to glue the joints together, although this +is not necessary if the joints are a tight fit. Sandpaper +the parts thoroughly, then stain to match +the other furniture. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_76" id="Page_76">[Pg 76]</a></span></p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Extension_Dining_Table_Complete" +id="Extension_Dining_Table_Complete"></a> +<img src="images/i-076.jpg" width="600" height="450" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Extension Dining Table Complete</span> +</div><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_77" id="Page_77">[Pg 77]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="AN_EXTENSION_DINING_TABLE" id="AN_EXTENSION_DINING_TABLE"></a>AN EXTENSION DINING TABLE</h2> + + +<p>The accompanying sketch and photograph show a simple design of an +extension dining table of the mission style. It is very easy to +construct and can be built at home by anyone who is at all handy with +tools. It should be made of quarter-sawed oak, which can be secured at +the mill ready cut to length, squared and sanded. Order the following +pieces:</p> + +<ul><li>2 top pieces, 1 by 23 by 46 in.</li> +<li>2 extra leaves, 1 by 12 by 46 in.</li> +<li>2 rails, 3/4 by 3 by 44 in.</li> +<li>4 rails, 3/4 by 3 by 22 in.</li> +<li>2 pieces for posts, 3/4 by 8 by 24 in.</li> +<li>2 pieces for posts, 3/4 by 6 by 24 in.</li> +<li>4 pieces for feet, 3 by 3 by 14 in.</li> +<li>4 pieces for feet, 3 by 3 by 5 in.</li> +<li>4 pieces for feet, 1 by 4 by 4 in.</li> +<li>4 pieces moulding, 1 by 1 by 10 in.</li> +<li>1 piece, 1 by 12 by 27 in., birchwood.</li> +<li>2 brackets, 3/4 by 3 by 32 in., birchwood.</li> +<li>2 pieces for slide, 1-3/4 by 3 by 36 in., birchwood.</li> +<li>4 pieces for slide, 1 by 3 by 36 in., birchwood.</li> +<li>12 pieces for slide, 3/4 by 1-1/2 by 36 in., birchwood.</li></ul> + + +<p>The feet can be made first by squaring up one end of each and beveling +the other as shown in the drawing. The short pieces are fastened to the +long ones by means of long screws and glue. The four square pieces +should be nailed to the outer ends and holes bored in them for the +casters. Prepare the pieces for the posts, and before nailing them +together fasten the feet to them with long screws. Be careful to get +them on square, else the table will not set level when complete. Now +nail and glue the pieces forming the table together and fasten the +moulding at the bottom. This moulding should have mitered corners as +shown in the bottom view. Also fasten the rest piece to the top of the +post, using long screws and glue.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_78" id="Page_78">[Pg 78]</a></span></p> +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 416px;"><a name="Details_of_Dining_Table" +id="Details_of_Dining_Table"></a> +<img src="images/i-078.jpg" width="416" height="593" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Details of Dining Table</span> +</div> + +<p>The slides can be made next. The pieces are made +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_79" id="Page_79">[Pg 79]</a></span> + +and fastened together with screws as shown in the enlarged detail view. +This slide, if made with care, is a good one. The center piece should be +firmly fastened to the post rest with long screws. The screws that +fasten into the top should be inserted from below through counter-bored +holes as shown.</p> + +<p>Miter the rails at the corners and glue them to the top. Blocks can be +used on the inside if desired, which will make a much stronger +construction. Screw the two brackets to the top as shown. These help to +support the table when it is extended.</p> + +<p>When complete the table should be carefully gone over with fine +sandpaper, and all glue and rough spots removed. Apply stain of the +desired color. This can be any one of the many mission stains supplied +by the trade for this purpose.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="AN_OAK-BOUND_CEDAR_CHEST" id="AN_OAK-BOUND_CEDAR_CHEST"></a>AN OAK-BOUND CEDAR CHEST</h2> + + +<p>This cedar chest for storing unused bedding or +furs is not a difficult thing to make and when made, +the hard oak binding takes the wear and protects +the softer cedar so that the chest ought to serve several +generations. Order the stock as follows:</p> + +<p>CEDAR</p> + +<ul><li>2 top and bottom pieces, 7/8 by 16-1/2 by 34-1/2 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>2 sides, 7/8 by 18-7/8 by 34-1/2 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>2 ends, 7/8 by 18-7/8 by 14-3/4 in., S-2-S.</li></ul> + + +<p>OAK</p> + +<ul><li>2 overhanging top pieces, 1 by 1 by 36-1/2 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>2 overhanging top pieces, 1 by 1 by 18-1/2 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>2 lock and hinge rails, 1 by 2-1/2 by 36-1/2 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>2 lock and hinge rails, 1 by 2-1/2 by 18-1/2 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>2 base pieces, 1 by 3-1/4 by 36-1/2 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>2 base pieces, 1 by 3-1/4 by 18-1/2 in., S-2-S.</li></ul> + + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_80" id="Page_80">[Pg 80]</a></span></p> +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Details_of_Cedar_Chest" +id="Details_of_Cedar_Chest"></a> +<img src="images/i-080.jpg" width="600" height="424" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Details of Cedar Chest</span> +</div> + +<p>Specify thoroughly seasoned Tennessee red cedar +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_81" id="Page_81">[Pg 81]</a></span> + +and plain sawed white oak and have the different +pieces mill-planed and sandpapered as indicated in +the stock-bill. This bill allows 1/2 in. extra on the +length and the width of each piece for "squaring up" +of all pieces except those marked to be surfaced on +four sides.</p> + +<p>Begin by squaring the sides and ends to size. +Probably the best joint for the corners is the dovetail. +If the worker is not experienced in woodworking, +some of the more simple joints will do. It will +be noted that the drawing and stock-bill call for the +simplest form of joint, that in which the sides of the +chest lap over the end. For the dovetail joint it will +be necessary to add 2 in. more to the length of the +end pieces, making them 16-3/4 in. each in the rough.</p> + +<p>Having got the sides and ends ready, fasten them +together. The perspective shows the sides fastened +to the ends with ornamental headed nails. Common +nails are first used, being equally spaced, and +the ornamental heads are afterwards placed so as +to cover their heads.</p> + +<p>Next square the bottom and nail it to the parts +just assembled. Square the top to the same size.</p> + +<p>The base stuff is squared on one edge only. The +second edge—the upper one—is to be beveled or +sloped 1/8 in. to facilitate dusting and for appearance +sake. Fit these base pieces to place, mitering the +joints. Before fastening the parts to the chest +proper, gauge a line 3/4 in. from the lower edge and +to a point 4-1/2 in. from each end, cut out to this line +and shape the base as shown in the drawing. Use +finishing nails for fastening the base to the chest. +The heads should be "set" so they may be covered +later with a putty colored to match the finish. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_82" id="Page_82">[Pg 82]</a></span></p> + +<p>In a similar manner plane up, cut and fit the +back and hinge rails. These rails should be kept +a "scant" 1/8 in. below the top edges of the chest +proper. The overhang of the lid fits down over in +such a way as to form a dust-proof joint between +lid and chest proper.</p> + +<p>The overhang of the lid of 1 in. by 1-in. stock +may next be mitered, fitted and nailed to the lid. +Thoroughly sandpaper all parts not so treated and +finish as follows: Put on all the oak pieces, two +coats of natural paste filler. This is best done before +they are fastened in place. Directions will be +found on the cans in which the filler is kept.</p> + +<p>The red of the cedar may be heightened by applying +a mahogany stain made of Bismark brown +aniline and boiling water, in the proportion of 3 qt. +of water to 1 oz. of aniline. If applied hot the stain +will enter the wood better. When dry, sandpaper +lightly with No. 00 paper, both this and the oak-filled +pieces.</p> + +<p>Fasten the oak pieces in place and give the whole +exterior a very thin coat of shellac. After this +has hardened, apply two coats of wax. Wax comes +in paste form and is to be applied with a cloth +very sparingly. Allow it to stand five or ten minutes +then rub briskly with a soft dry cloth to polish. +The first coat is allowed to stand 24 hours before +the second is applied in a similar manner.</p> + +<p>Another finish, known as an egg-shell gloss shellac +finish, is obtained by omitting the wax and instead +applying from two to five more coats of +shellac. Allow each coat 24 hours in which to +harden, and rub each hardened coat to a smooth + +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_83" id="Page_83">[Pg 83]</a></span> +finish, using curled hair, or fine steel wool, or fine +oiled sandpaper, before applying the next.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Cedar_Chest_Complete" +id="Cedar_Chest_Complete"></a> +<img src="images/i-083.jpg" width="600" height="361" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Cedar Chest Complete</span> +</div> + +<p>The metal reinforcements for the corners can be +bought at a hardware store, as can the lock, hinges, +and handles. These parts are applied in the usual +manner—butt hinges being used.</p> + +<p>If well made, the chest is practically airtight. +The interior is all of red cedar, while the effect of +the exterior in combining the light oak and the +red cedar is striking. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_84" id="Page_84">[Pg 84]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="A_TOOL_FOR_MAKING_MORTISES" id="A_TOOL_FOR_MAKING_MORTISES"></a>A TOOL FOR MAKING MORTISES</h2> + + +<p>In the construction of mission furniture where +mortise joints are mostly used, those who cannot +have access to a mortising machine will find the +following method of great assistance in obtaining a +true mortise, which is necessary in work of this +kind.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Boring_Holes_for_Tenons" +id="Boring_Holes_for_Tenons"></a> +<img src="images/i-084.jpg" width="600" height="375" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Boring Holes for Tenons</span> +</div> + +<p>Take a block of wood, A, the exact thickness of the piece B to be +mortised, and with an auger bore a hole, the same size as the width of +the mortise to be made, exactly parallel to the sides of the block. This +can best be done on a drill press or a wood boring machine. If no +machine is available, great care should be taken in boring by hand, to +get the hole as nearly true as possible. Then nail a cleat, C, on the +side of the block, A, and let it extend down on piece B. Use a clamp to +hold the block in place while boring out the mortise. By changing the +position of the block and boring a number of holes, any length of +mortise can be made. The holes should afterwards be squared up with a +chisel.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_85" id="Page_85">[Pg 85]</a></span> +</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="A_DRESSER_FOR_CHILDS_PLAYROOM" id="A_DRESSER_FOR_CHILDS_PLAYROOM"></a>A DRESSER FOR CHILD'S PLAYROOM</h2> + + +<p>This dresser can be made of two kinds of wood as marked on the drawing +or it can be made all of one kind. The original dresser was made of oak +and walnut and was finished natural, the contrast between the light and +dark woods adding much to the value of the piece in the eyes of the +little ones. Have all surfaces that will show well sandpapered at the +mill. The following is a list of the material wanted:</p> + +<ul><li>4 oak posts, 1-1/2 in. square by 19-1/2 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>3 walnut drawer fronts, 3/4 by 5 by 17 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>6 yellow poplar drawer sides, 3/8 by 5 by 12 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>3 yellow poplar backs, 3/8 by 4-1/2 by 16-1/2 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>3 yellow poplar bottoms, 3/8 by 12 by 16-1/2 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>4 oak front stretchers, 7/8 by 1-3/4 by 17-1/2 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>4 oak side rails, 7/8 by 2 by 12 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>2 walnut side panels, 1/4 by 11 by 14-1/2 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>8 oak drawer slides, 7/8 by 2 by 10-1/2 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>6 oak drawer guides, 1/2 by 3/4 by 10-1/2 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>4 oak back stretchers, 7/8 by 2 by 17-1/2 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>1 oak top, 5/8 by 14 by 20-1/2 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>3 sq. ft. of 3/8 in. matched yellow pine ceiling for back.</li></ul> + + +<p>MIRROR SUPPORT</p> + +<ul><li>1 walnut piece, 7/8 by 1-3/4 by 20-1/2 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>1 walnut piece, 7/8 by 1-1/2 by 18 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>1 oak piece, 3/4 by 1-1/4 by 10-1/2 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>2 oak pieces, 7/8 by 1-1/2 by 11 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>1 walnut bracket piece, 7/8 by 1-1/4 by 5 in., S-2-S.</li></ul> + + +<p>MIRROR FRAME PARTS</p> + +<ul><li>2 walnut pieces, 7/8 by 1-1/2 by 12-1/2 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>2 walnut pieces, 7/8 by 1-1/2 by 10-1/2 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>2 oak pieces, 1/4 by 3/8 by 10 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>2 oak pieces, 1/4 by 3/8 by 8 in., S-4-S.</li> +<li>1 back, 3/16 by 8 by 10 in., soft wood.</li> +<li>2 cleats, 3/8 by 1-1/4 by 8 in.</li> +<li>1 plain mirror glass, 7-1/2 by 9-1/2 in.</li></ul> + + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_86" id="Page_86">[Pg 86]</a></span></p> +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Details_of_Dresser" +id="Details_of_Dresser"></a> +<img src="images/i-086.jpg" width="600" height="367" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Details of Dresser</span> +</div> + +<p>Begin by planing the four posts to length. The +lower ends should be slightly beveled to prevent their +slivering. Cut the mortises for the tenons that are +on the ends of the side rails. These rails are to be 7/8 +by 2 in. and the tenons should be 3/8 by 1-1/4 in. wide +by 3/4 in. long. The posts should be rabbeted down +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_87" id="Page_87">[Pg 87]</a></span> + +to their middles to a depth of 3/8 in. so as to receive +the 1/4-in. end panels. The end rails should be cut to +length and their tenons worked after one edge of each +has been rabbeted as were the posts.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 366px;"><a name="Dresser_Complete" +id="Dresser_Complete"></a> +<img src="images/i-087.jpg" width="366" height="600" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Dresser Complete</span> +</div><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_88" id="Page_88">[Pg 88]</a></span></p> + +<p>Having squared the panels to size, put the two ends +of the dresser together with glue. Next make the four +frames which are to carry the drawers. They should +measure from outside to outside, in length 17-1/2 in.; +in width, 12-1/2 in. It is intended that the short pieces +shall be tenoned into the long ones. When these +frames are ready, cut out each corner as indicated +in the cross section drawing. Reduce to size the +drawer guides and fasten them in place. Dowel the +frames to the ends of the dresser in the places indicated +on the drawing. Put on the back, nailing into +frames to the ends of the dresser in the places indicated +and fasten the top in place, putting screws into it from +the under side.</p> + +<p>The mirror frame and support should next be made. +The drawing shows quite clearly the parts and their +relation to each other. All the slopes are of 45 deg. +Instead of rabbeting the mirror frame, a 1/4 by 3/8-in. +fillet of oak is nailed around to form the recess, the +walnut frame and oak fillet making a pretty contrast. +All nail holes are to be filled with putty colored to +match the finish. Wooden pins or round-head +screws are to be used to fasten the mirror frame to +its support and should be placed above center an +inch or so.</p> + +<p>The drawers are to be constructed in the usual manner. +It is a good plan to make the grooves 1/16 in. +narrower than the stock is thick to insure a fit, chamfering +the under or back sides of the bottom and back +if necessary. Make the sides of the drawers of such +a length that when the drawer has been pushed in as +far as it will go, the front will be recessed about 1/4 in. +behind the front crosspieces. Groove the inside of the +drawer front 3/16 in. to receive the bottom. The mirror +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_89" id="Page_89">[Pg 89]</a></span> +should not be placed until the wood has been +finished.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Drawer_Construction" +id="Drawer_Construction"></a> +<img src="images/i-089.jpg" width="600" height="570" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">DRAWER CONSTRUCTION</span> +</div> + +<p>Finish the wood natural, apply three coats of varnish. +Rub the first two with haircloth or curled hair +and the last with pulverized pumice stone and crude +oil or raw linseed oil. This gives an egg-shell gloss. +For a dull finish, rub the varnish after it has become +bone dry with pulverized pumice stone and water, +using a piece of rubbing felt. Rub until the surface +is smooth and even, and clean with a wet sponge or +chamois skin. If a polished finish is desired, rub first +with pulverized pumice stone and water, then with +rotten stone and water. Finish with a mixture of oil +and a little pulverized rotten stone. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_90" id="Page_90">[Pg 90]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CUTTING_TENONS_WITH_A_HAND-SAW" id="CUTTING_TENONS_WITH_A_HAND-SAW"></a>CUTTING TENONS WITH A HAND-SAW</h2> + + +<p>This home-made tool will be a great help in the +construction of mission furniture. With its use, +tenons may be entirely cut with a saw, discarding +the use of a chisel and mallet. The device consists +of a convenient length of straight board, A, Fig. +1, wide enough to cover the widest piece to be +tenoned. A piece of board, B, is fastened to A with +brads or small screws. This board should have a +thickness equal to the piece to be cut from the side +of the tenon. The piece C is fastened to A and B +with small cleats at their upper ends. The space +between B and C should be wide enough for the +blade of a saw to run through easily, and also long +enough to take in the widest part of the saw blade. +The tool and piece to be tenoned are placed in a +vise as shown in Fig. 2. The width of the piece removed +for the tenon may be varied by putting in +pieces of cardboard between the work, E, and the +piece A, Fig. 1.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Sawing_Tenons" +id="Sawing_Tenons"></a> +<img src="images/i-090.jpg" width="600" height="351" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Sawing Tenons</span> +</div><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_91" id="Page_91">[Pg 91]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="ARTS_AND_CRAFTS_OIL_LAMP" id="ARTS_AND_CRAFTS_OIL_LAMP"></a>ARTS AND CRAFTS OIL LAMP</h2> + + +<p>Electricity and gas are not always accessible in +suburban or country homes and the regular type of a +mission lamp would be of little use. The illustration +shows an ordinary round wick kerosene lamp fitted +out in mission style.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Oil_Lamp" +id="Oil_Lamp"></a> +<img src="images/i-091.jpg" width="600" height="464" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Artistic Mission Style Oil Lamp</span> +</div> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_92" id="Page_92">[Pg 92]</a></span></p> +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Bronze_Shade_Holder" +id="Bronze_Shade_Holder"></a> +<img src="images/i-092.jpg" width="600" height="455" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Bronze Shade Holder</span> +</div> + +<p>A few modifications were made in the design of an +expensive lamp to simplify the construction. The +lamp should have a tall chimney. The dimensions +given in the drawings, and the photograph, will explain +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_93" id="Page_93">[Pg 93]</a></span> + +themselves. Many of the details can be worked +up by the maker.</p> + +<p>The body of the lamp is made of 1/2-in. oak and is +provided with openings as shown. The interior receptacle +is very handy for holding a match box, smoking articles, etc.</p> + +<p>A piece of copper band, 1 in. wide, is fastened to +the body with large upholsterers' tacks, to give it a +finished appearance. The base is 7/8 in. thick and in +order to prevent tilting is provided with four square +feet, 1/4 in. thick. The top piece of the body is 1/2-in. +oak, which is provided with a hole large enough to +receive the bowl of the lamp. If such a lamp is not +at hand, one can be purchased at a very reasonable +price.</p> + +<p>The shade is made of oak frames set in with clouded +art glass panels. The different sections of the frames +are fastened together with brass screws and the glass +is held in place by triangular cleats of oak. Be sure +and fit the shade with cardboard panels before ordering +the glass. The cardboard can be used as a pattern +in cutting the glass, and the glass will then fit without +recutting, which is quite difficult.</p> + +<p>The glass beaded fringe should be of suitable color +to harmonize with the finished lamp.</p> + +<p>The shade is supported by four brackets cast in +bronze from a wood pattern (dimensions given) and +finished by filing, buffing and lacquering. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_94" id="Page_94">[Pg 94]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="ANOTHER_CHINA_CLOSET" id="ANOTHER_CHINA_CLOSET"></a>ANOTHER CHINA CLOSET</h2> + + +<p>The china closet shown in the accompanying +illustration is well proportioned and of pleasing +appearance. It can be made of any one of the +several furniture woods in common use, but quarter-sawed +oak will be found to give the most pleasing +effect. The stock should be ordered from the mill +ready sawed to length, squared and sanded. In this +way much hard labor will be saved. The following +pieces will be needed:</p> + +<ul><li>1 top, 1 by 19 by 38 in., S-1-S.</li> +<li>4 posts, 3/4 by 3 by 59 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>4 side rails, 3/4 by 3 by 31 in., S-1-S.</li> +<li>4 end uprights, 1 by 2 by 48-1/2 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>4 end rails, 1 by 3 by 16 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>2 lattice rails, 1 by 2 by 13 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>1 top board, 3/4 by 3 by 36 in., S-1-S.</li> +<li>4 side door rails, 3/4 by 2 by 47 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>6 cross rails, 3/4 by 2 by 12 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>4 slats, 1/2 by 3/4 by 16-1/2 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>4 slats, 1/2 by 3/4 by 13-1/2 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>8 slats, 1/2 by 3/4 by 12-1/2 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>4 shelves, 5/8 by 16 by 32 in., S-1-S., poplar.</li> +<li>4 cleats, 1 in. sq. by 55 in., soft wood.</li> +<li>4 cleats, 1 in. sq. by 28 in., soft wood.</li> +<li>4 cleats, 1 in. sq. by 14 in., soft wood.</li></ul> + + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 374px;"><a name="China_Closet_with_Latticework" +id="China_Closet_with_Latticework"></a> +<img src="images/i-095.jpg" width="374" height="600" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">China Closet with Latticework Doors and Sides</span> +</div><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_96" id="Page_96">[Pg 96]</a></span></p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_95" id="Page_95">[Pg 95]</a></span></p> +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Details_of_China" +id="Details_of_China"></a> +<img src="images/i-096.jpg" width="600" height="426" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Details of China Closet</span> +</div> + +<p>Having this material on hand, start with the four +posts, as they are all alike. Clamp them together, +being careful to have them of the right length, and +the ends square. Trim the bottom, as shown in the +detail drawing, and then lay out the mortises for +the front and back rails. These rails can now be +laid out and the tenons cut to fit the mortises in the +posts. The back rails should, in addition, be rabbeted +for the back board as shown. The end rails +are fastened to the posts by means of screws through +1-in. square cleats, fastened on the inside of the posts +as shown in the section A-A. In all cases the screws +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_97" id="Page_97">[Pg 97]</a></span> +should be run through the cleats into the framing +so the heads will not show. The end rails should +be rabbeted on the inside for the latticework and the +glass.</p> + +<p>The back board should have the corners rounded +as shown and be fastened to the top board with +screws through from the bottom side. The top +board is then fastened to the top rail cleats in the +same manner.</p> + +<p>The doors are put together by means of tenons +and mortises. The frames should be rabbeted on +the inside for the latticework and the glass. Leaded +glass can be used in place of this latticework, if it is +desired. Suitable hinges and a catch should be supplied. +These can be purchased at any hardware +store.</p> + +<p>The shelves should be cut out at the corners to fit +around the cleats. They rest on small blocks which +are fastened to the cleats, or if desired, small holes +can be drilled and pins used instead.</p> + +<p>The back is put on in the usual manner. A mirror +can be put in without much trouble if it is desired.</p> + +<p>When putting the frame together, glue should be +used on the joints, as it makes them much stiffer. +Be careful to get the frame together perfectly +square, or it will be hard to fit the doors and the +glass. When it is complete, go over the whole carefully +with fine sandpaper and remove all rough spots. +Scrape all the surplus glue from about the joints, as +stain will not take when there is any glue. The +closet can be finished in any one of the many mission +stains supplied by the trade for this purpose. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_98" id="Page_98">[Pg 98]</a></span></p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Oak_Bedstead_Complete" +id="Oak_Bedstead_Complete"></a> +<img src="images/i-098.jpg" width="600" height="332" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Oak Bedstead Complete</span> +</div><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_99" id="Page_99">[Pg 99]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="AN_OAK_BEDSTEAD" id="AN_OAK_BEDSTEAD"></a>AN OAK BEDSTEAD</h2> + + +<p>The accompanying sketches show an artistic design +for a mission bed, so simple in construction and +design that most any one that has a few tools and +a knowledge of their use can make it. It is best +made of quarter-sawed oak, as this wood is the +easiest to procure and work up and looks well with +any finish. If the stock is ordered from the mill +ready cut to length, squared and sanded, much of +the hard labor will be saved.</p> + +<p>The following is a list of the material needed:</p> + +<ul><li>2 posts, 2-1/2 by 2-1/2 by 50 in.</li> +<li>2 posts, 2-1/2 by 2-1/2 by 44 in.</li> +<li>2 end rails, 1 by 6 by 56 in.</li> +<li>2 side rails, 1 by 6 by 78 in.</li> +<li>5 end rails, 1 by 4 by 56 in.</li> +<li>3 end rails, 1 by 2 by 56 in.</li> +<li>8 vertical slats, 3/8 by 6 by 11-1/2 in.</li> +<li>10 vertical slats, 3/8 by 2 by 11-1/2 in.</li> +<li>2 cleats, 1 by 1 by 78 in.</li> +<li>5 slats, 3/4 by 3 by 55-1/2 in.</li> +<li>20 blocks, 1 by 1 by 3 in.</li></ul> + + +<p>Square up the four posts in pairs and lay out the +mortises as per drawing. To do this, lay them side +by side on a flat surface with the ends square and +mark them with a try-square. The tenons on the +end rails are laid out in the same manner as the +posts. Four of the end rails should be marked and +mortises cut for the upright slats as shown in the +detail drawing. The tenons on the end rails are +about 1 in. long, while those on the slats can be 3/4 in. +long. Fit all the parts together before gluing to +see that they fit square and tight. After the glue +has been applied clamp them together perfectly +square and set them away to dry. They should dry +at least twenty-four hours before the clamps are +removed.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_100" id="Page_100">[Pg 100]</a></span></p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Details_of_Oak_Bedstead" +id="Details_of_Oak_Bedstead"></a> +<img src="images/i-100.jpg" width="600" height="340" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Details of Oak Bedstead</span> +</div><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_101" id="Page_101">[Pg 101]</a></span></p> + +<p>While the ends are drying, the side rails can be +made. These have a 1-in. square cleat screwed to +the inner side for the slats to rest upon. If springs +are used, five slats will be sufficient. They can be +placed where the springs will rest upon them. After +the position of the slats has been located, nail small +blocks at their sides to hold them in place. For fastening +the side rails to the posts, patent devices can +be purchased at a local hardware store. The posts +will have to be mortised to receive these, and care +should be exercised to get them in the right place.</p> + +<p>When the bed is complete go over it carefully and +scrape all the surplus glue from about the joints, as +the finish will not take where there is any glue. Remove +all rough spots with fine sandpaper; then apply +the stain you like best, which may be any of the +many mission stains supplied by the trade for this +purpose. If this bed is well made and finished, it +will be an ornament to any home.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="AN_OAK_FOOTSTOOL" id="AN_OAK_FOOTSTOOL"></a>AN OAK FOOTSTOOL</h2> + + +<p>The footstool shown in the illustration can be made +from any kind of wood, but when it is intended to be +finished in mission style, quarter-sawed oak will produce +the best effect. The material needed will be as +follows:</p> + +<ul><li>1 top, 1 by 9-1/2 by 12 in., S-1-S.</li> +<li>2 legs, 3/4 by 8 by 12 in., S-2-S.</li> +<li>1 brace, 3/4 by 7 by 9 in., S-1-S.</li></ul> + + +<p>Order these pieces cut to length, squared and sanded. +A full-sized layout of the front view should be made +to get the correct bevels for the legs and brace. The +design of the legs can be varied to suit the fancy of +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_102" id="Page_102">[Pg 102]</a></span> +the maker. For such a design as shown draw one-half +of it on paper; fold on the center line and with scissors +cut both sides of the outline by following the lines +drawn. Trace around this pattern on the wood, and +saw out with a compass or keyhole saw. The sawed +edges should be smoothed and sandpapered.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Details_of_Stool" +id="Details_of_Stool"></a> +<img src="images/i-102.jpg" width="600" height="834" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Details of Footstool</span> +</div><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_103" id="Page_103">[Pg 103]</a></span></p> + +<p>The perforation in the top board is made by first +boring holes, then trimming out the edges with a sharp +chisel. Be sure to get the best side of the board up.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Footstool_Complete" +id="Footstool_Complete"></a> +<img src="images/i-103.jpg" width="600" height="513" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Footstool Complete</span> +</div> + +<p>The legs are fastened to the top and to the braces +with 1-3/4-in. wood screws as shown in the detail drawing. +After the stool is assembled, go over it carefully +with fine sandpaper and remove all rough spots before +applying the finish. This finish can be any one of the +many different kinds supplied by the trade for this +purpose. If this stool is well made and finished, it will +be a useful and attractive article. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_104" id="Page_104">[Pg 104]</a></span></p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Table_and_Seat" +id="Table_and_Seat"></a> +<img src="images/i-104.jpg" width="600" height="322" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Table and Seat Decorated in Pyro-Carving</span> +</div><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_105" id="Page_105">[Pg 105]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="A_LIBRARY_SET_IN_PYRO-CARVING" id="A_LIBRARY_SET_IN_PYRO-CARVING"></a>A LIBRARY SET IN PYRO-CARVING</h2> + + +<p>The multitude of indifferently executed small +articles which followed the introduction of pyrography +is beginning to disappear, people are considering the +art more seriously and applying it to more dignified +uses. Pyro-carving is one of the new methods of +decorating furniture which is both beautiful and +practical, two qualities which do not always go +together.</p> + +<p>The library set illustrated consists of a table, 30 by +50 in., with two benches, 14 in. wide of the same length. +The supports are made of selected white pine, which +must be absolutely free from pitch. The pine is soft +enough to work easily with the point and stands wear +much better than basswood. The tops and braces are +made of curly fir, all of the material must be 2-in. +lumber, which dresses to about an inch and a half. All +surfaces, except the faces of the supports, are given a +well-rubbed coat of oil with a little burnt umber, the +stain to be applied directly to the wood without a +filler.</p> + +<p>On the outside of the supports the design is drawn +in with pencil, the background is then cut out smoothly +with a chisel to the depth of an eighth of an inch, +leaving the decoration in relief. It is then burned +deeply, the background in straight flat strokes, the outlines +having the effect of a sloping, dark edge. The +shadows are burned in as deeply as possible and the +shading is put in with the flat of the point.</p> + +<p>A wax or egg-shell oil varnish finish is most suitable +for this set.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_106" id="Page_106">[Pg 106]</a></span></p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Grille_for_an_Arch" +id="Grille_for_an_Arch"></a> +<img src="images/i-106.jpg" width="600" height="405" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Grille for an Arch</span> +</div><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_107" id="Page_107">[Pg 107]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="A_GRILLE_WITH_PEDESTALS_TO_MATCH" id="A_GRILLE_WITH_PEDESTALS_TO_MATCH"></a>A GRILLE WITH PEDESTALS TO MATCH</h2> + + +<p>The accompanying sketch shows something unique +in a grille that adds to the appearance of a home +furnished in mission style. When it is stained and +finished to match the furniture, it gives a consummate +tone that would be difficult to obtain by any other +means.</p> + +<p>To get the best results it should be made to blend +with the furniture and the arch in which it is to fit, in +both weight and style. This will depend very much +upon one's preference, and for this reason full dimensions +are not given. No difficulty will be experienced, +however, by anyone handy with tools, in making it.</p> + +<p>The material should be quarter-sawed oak, which +can be secured planed and sanded at the mill. For +the grille order 1 by 1-1/2-in. and 1/2 by 1-1/2-in. stock. +The method of making the bars is shown in the detailed +sketch. The two end bars should be made of +solid pieces, 3/4 by 1-1/2 in., with two rectangular slots +mortised in each to receive the supports. The supports +should be just the right length to go in the arch. +To erect, slip the end bars on the supports, hold the +grille in place and fasten the bars to the sides of the +arch with screws.</p> + +<p>The size of the pedestals and the connecting pieces +will depend upon the size of the arch. These connecting +pieces should be well mortised into the post, +and if you own your own home and intend the pedestals +to become a fixture, they should also be mortised into +the sides of the arch. If not, they may be fastened +to the arch with blind screws. The amount of material +required will depend upon the size of the arch. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_108" id="Page_108">[Pg 108]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="A_LADYS_WRITING_DESK" id="A_LADYS_WRITING_DESK"></a>A LADY'S WRITING DESK</h2> + + +<p>This desk of mission style is a little more complicated +than some of the other pieces of mission +furniture that have been described, but anyone who +has a fair knowledge of tools will not have much +trouble in constructing it in the home workshop if +the plans are carefully followed. Quarter-sawed +oak is the best wood to use, as it is easy to work and +looks best when finished. Order the stock from the +mill ready cut to length, squared and sanded. Following +is a list of the stock needed:</p> + +<ul><li>2 front posts, 2 by 2 by 30 in.</li> +<li>2 back posts, 2 by 2 by 50 in.</li> +<li>1 bottom rail, 3/4 by 3 by 31 in.</li> +<li>2 end rails, 3/4 by 3 by 18 in.</li> +<li>1 stretcher, 3/4 by 8 by 33-1/2 in.</li> +<li>2 end slats, 3/8 by 8 by 15 in.</li> +<li>1 back slat, 3/8 by 8 by 15-1/2 in.</li> +<li>2 back slats, 3/8 by 3 by 15-1/2 in.</li> +<li>1 front drawer rail, 3/4 by 1-1/4 by 31-1/4 in.</li> +<li>2 side drawer rails, 3/4 by 3 by 18-1/4 in.</li> +<li>1 drawer front, 3/4 by 6 by 30 in.</li> +<li>1 desk lid, 3/4 by 18 by 31-1/4 in.</li> +<li>1 desk board, 3/4 by 19-1/4 by 31-1/4 in.</li> +<li>2 end boards, 3/4 by 19 by 21-1/4 in.</li> +<li>1 top board, 3/4 by 10 by 34 in.</li> +<li>1 top back board, 3/4 by 5 by 31-1/4 in.</li> +<li>1 back board, 3/4 by 30 by 22 in.</li> +<li>2 drawer sides, 1/2 by 6 by 19-1/2 in., S.W.</li> +<li>1 drawer end, 1/2 by 6 by 29 in., S.W.</li> +<li>1 drawer bottom, 1/2 by 18 by 29 in., S.W.</li> +<li>2 pieces for pigeon holes, 3/8 by 7 by 23 in., S.W.</li> +<li>8 pieces for pigeon holes, 3/8 by 4 by 6-3/4 in., S.W.</li></ul> + + +<p>Start with the back posts, being sure they are +square and of the right length; place them side by +side and lay out the mortises for the lower rails, the +desk rails and the top back boards, as shown in the +accompanying detail drawing. Lay out the front +posts in the same manner. Cut the tenons on the +ends of the rails to fit the mortises in the posts. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_109" id="Page_109">[Pg 109]</a></span> +Also cut mortises in the rails for the back and end +slats. The end rails have a mortise in them for +the tenons on the ends of the foot boards. Clamp +the ends of the desk together, with the end rails in +place; then fit the side boards. Bore holes through +the posts into the side boards for dowels as shown. +After the dowels are in place the holes can be +plugged.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Details_of_Writing" +id="Details_of_Writing"></a> +<img src="images/i-109.jpg" width="600" height="518" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Details of Writing Desk</span> +</div> + +<p>Cut and fit the top back board, the bottom rail, +the back board and the stretcher. Cut the top and +desk boards at the back corners to clear the posts. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_110" id="Page_110">[Pg 110]</a></span> +The top board is to be fastened to the side boards +with blind screws. The back board is fastened to +the posts with dowels as shown.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 553px;"><a name="Desk_Complete" +id="Desk_Complete"></a> +<img src="images/i-110.jpg" width="553" height="600" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Desk Complete</span> +</div> + +<p>When all the parts fit square and tight they can +be glued together. The ends of the desk should be +glued up first and left to dry, then the other parts +put in place and glued. When clamping the parts +together see that they fit perfectly square and tight. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_111" id="Page_111">[Pg 111]</a></span> +While the glue is drying the drawer can be made. +The front board is made of oak, but the other parts +may be made of some soft wood. The side pieces +are mortised and glued to the front board, The end +and bottom boards can be nailed together.</p> + +<p>The drop lid of the desk is made as shown. Two +or more boards may have to be glued together for +the lid, the desk bottom and the back board. The +lid is fastened to the desk board with two hinges, +and it should be so arranged that when closed it will +be even with the sides. Brackets or chains are +fastened to the inside to hold it in the proper position +when it is open. Small blocks of wood fastened +to the inner edge of the side boards will prevent it +from closing too far. A lock, if desired, can be +purchased at a hardware store and fitted in place. +Suitable handles for the drawer should also be provided.</p> + +<p>When the desk is complete go over it with fine +sandpaper and remove all rough spots. Scrape all +glue from about the joints, as the finish will not take +where there is any glue.</p> + +<p>The pigeonholes are made from 3/8-in. stock. +They may be tacked in place after the desk is finished.</p> + +<p>The finish can be any one of the many mission +stains supplied by the trade for this purpose. If +the desk is well made and finished, it will have a +very neat and attractive appearance. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_112" id="Page_112">[Pg 112]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="A_TELEPHONE_STAND_AND_STOOL" id="A_TELEPHONE_STAND_AND_STOOL"></a>A TELEPHONE STAND AND STOOL</h2> + + +<p>The stand shown in the accompanying illustration +is for use with a desk telephone. The stool when +not in use, slides on two runners under the stand. +A shelf is provided for the telephone directory, paper, +pencil, etc.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 446px;"><a name="Stand_and_Stool_Complete" +id="Stand_and_Stool_Complete"></a> +<img src="images/i-112.jpg" width="446" height="600" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Stand and Stool Complete</span> +</div> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 494px;"><a name="Details_of_Stand_and_Stool" +id="Details_of_Stand_and_Stool"></a> +<img src="images/i-113.jpg" width="494" height="600" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Details of Stand and Stool</span> +</div> + +<p>The joints may be made with dowels, or the mortise +and tenon may be used, as desired. If the latter +is decided upon, allowance must be made on the +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_113" id="Page_113">[Pg 113]</a></span> +length of the rails for the tenons. The list given is +for the dowel-made joints. The following stock list +gives the amount of material needed which should +be ordered planed and sanded. This work can be +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_114" id="Page_114">[Pg 114]</a></span> +done by hand if the builder has the time and desires +to have an entire home-made article. However, +the list is given for the mill-planed material.</p> + +<p>STAND</p> + +<ul><li>4 posts, 1-1/2 in. square by 29 in.</li> +<li>2 rails, 7/8 by 5 by 11 in.</li> +<li>1 rail, 7/8 by 1-1/2 by 13 in.</li> +<li>1 rail, 7/8 by 5 by 13 in.</li> +<li>2 runners, 7/8 by 1-1/2 by 14 in.</li> +<li>1 top, 7/8 by 18 by 20 in.</li> +<li>1 shelf, 7/8 by 12-7/8 by 13-3/4 in.</li></ul> + + +<p>STOOL</p> + +<ul><li>4 posts, 1-1/2 in. square by 17 in.</li> +<li>4 rails, 7/8 by 4 by 6-1/2 in.</li> +<li>4 rails, 7/8 by 2 by 6-1/2 in.</li> +<li>1 stretcher, 7/8 by 4 by 7-1/4 in.</li> +<li>1 top, 7/8 by 12-1/2 in. square.</li></ul> + + +<p>The exact lengths for the posts are given in the +list. Should the builder desire to square them up, +allowance must be made for this when ordering +stock.</p> + +<p>Arrange all the pieces in the position they are to +occupy in the finished stand and stool and number +all the joints. Locate the centers and bore holes for +all the dowels. Assemble the two sides of the table +first. Notch the runners and fasten them to the +posts with flat-head screws. Use hot glue on the +dowel joints if possible.</p> + +<p>Cut the corners out of the shelf to fit the legs and +assemble the frame of the table. Use round-head +screws through the rails to hold the shelf. The top +may be fastened in two ways, with screws through +cleats on the inside of the rails and under the top, +or with screws slanting through the upper part of +the rails and into the top as shown. The stool, is +assembled in the same manner as the stand.</p> + +<p>The stand and stool should be finished to harmonize +with the furniture and woodwork of the +room in which they are to be used. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_115" id="Page_115">[Pg 115]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="HOW_TO_MAKE_A_DOWEL-CUTTING_TOOL" id="HOW_TO_MAKE_A_DOWEL-CUTTING_TOOL"></a>HOW TO MAKE A DOWEL-CUTTING TOOL</h2> + + +<p>Secure a piece of steel about 1/4 in. thick, 1-3/4 in. +wide and 8 in. long. Drill various sized holes +through the steel as shown in Fig. 1, leaving the +edge of each hole as sharp as the drill will make +them. Cut off a block of wood the length necessary +for the dowels and split it up into pieces about the +size for the particular dowel to be used. Lay the +steel on something flat, over a hole of some kind, +then start one of the pieces of wood in the proper +size hole for the dowel and drive it through with a +hammer, as shown in Fig. 2. The sharp edges on +the steel will cut the dowel as smooth and round as +if it were turned in a lathe.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Make_Dowels" +id="Make_Dowels"></a> +<img src="images/i-115.jpg" width="600" height="569" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Easy Way to Make Dowels</span> +</div><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_116" id="Page_116">[Pg 116]</a></span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="A_MEDICINE_CABINET" id="A_MEDICINE_CABINET"></a>A MEDICINE CABINET</h2> + + +<p>This cabinet is best made of quarter-sawed oak, as +this wood is the most easily procured and looks well +when finished. Order the stock from the mill ready +cut to length, squared and sanded. The following +pieces will be needed:</p> + +<ul><li>4 posts, 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 28 in.</li> +<li>4 side rails, 3/4 by 2 by 16 in.</li> +<li>4 end rails, 3/4 by 2 by 7 in.</li> +<li>2 door rails, 3/4 by 2 by 15 in.</li> +<li>2 door rails, 3/4 by 2 by 22-3/4 in.</li> +<li>1 door panel, 1/4 by 11-1/2 by 19-1/4 in.</li> +<li>1 back panel, 1/4 by 15-1/2 by 23-1/4 in.</li> +<li>2 end panels, 1/4 by 6-1/2 by 23-1/4 in.</li> +<li>2 pieces for top and bottom, 1/2 by 6-3/4 by 15-3/4 in.</li></ul> + + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 445px;"><a name="Medicine_Cabinet_Complete" +id="Medicine_Cabinet_Complete"></a> +<img src="images/i-116.jpg" width="445" height="600" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Medicine Cabinet Complete</span> +</div> + +<p>Square the four posts and bevel the tops as shown. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_117" id="Page_117">[Pg 117]</a></span></p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 437px;"><a name="Details_of_Medicine_Cabinet" +id="Details_of_Medicine_Cabinet"></a> +<img src="images/i-117.jpg" width="437" height="600" alt="" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Details of Medicine Cabinet</span> +</div> + +<p>Cut grooves in them with a plow plane to receive the +1/4-in. panels. The tenons on the rails are cut 1/4 in. +wide and fit into the grooves in the posts the same +as the panels. The rails have grooves cut at the +inside edges for the panels. The front posts do not +have grooves on the inside but have two mortises, +one at each end for the top and bottom rails. The +back has a panel fitted in the same as the ends. See +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_118" id="Page_118">[Pg 118]</a></span> +that the pieces fit together perfectly square and +tight, then glue them together and give it time to +dry.</p> + +<p>The top and bottom boards are next put in place. +The top is placed in the center of the top rails while +the bottom is put even with the lower edge of the +bottom rails, as shown in the detail drawing. The +door frame is mitered at the corners and rabbeted +on the inner edge to take the panel. A mirror can +be used in place of the panel if desired. Suitable +hinges and a catch, which can be purchased at a +hardware store, should be supplied for the door.</p> + +<p>The shelves are of soft wood and are to be arranged +to suit the maker. Before applying a finish, +go over the cabinet with fine sandpaper and remove +all the surplus glue about the joints and the rough +spots, else the finish will not take evenly. The finish +can be any one of the many different kinds supplied +by the trade for this purpose.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 200px;"> +<img src="images/i-118.jpg" width="200" height="67" alt="" title="" /></div> + + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h3>Transcriber's Notes:</h3> + +<ul><li>Added a Table of Contents at head of document.</li> +<li>Removed Table of Contents at foot of document.</li> +<li>Added a List of Illustrations.</li> +<li>Folio 118: "perfectly" was "perfecly".</li> +<li>Folio 4 and 81 "mill-planed" was "millplaned".</li> +<li>Added captions for clarity:</li> +<li>Folio 27: "A WASTE PAPER BASKET".</li> +<li>Folio 28: "DETAILS OF WASTE PAPER BASKET".</li> +<li>Folio 58: "MAKING SCREWS HOLD IN END GRAIN".</li></ul> + + +<p> </p> +<p> </p> +<hr class="full" /> +<p>***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK MISSION FURNITURE***</p> +<p>******* This file should be named 23991-h.txt or 23991-h.zip *******</p> +<p>This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:<br /> +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/3/9/9/23991">http://www.gutenberg.org/2/3/9/9/23991</a></p> +<p>Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed.</p> + +<p>Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution.</p> + + + +<pre> +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/license">http://www.gutenberg.org/license)</a>. + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS,' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Each eBook is in a subdirectory of the same number as the eBook's +eBook number, often in several formats including plain vanilla ASCII, +compressed (zipped), HTML and others. + +Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks replace the old file and take over +the old filename and etext number. The replaced older file is renamed. +VERSIONS based on separate sources are treated as new eBooks receiving +new filenames and etext numbers. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org">http://www.gutenberg.org</a> + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + +EBooks posted prior to November 2003, with eBook numbers BELOW #10000, +are filed in directories based on their release date. If you want to +download any of these eBooks directly, rather than using the regular +search system you may utilize the following addresses and just +download by the etext year. + +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/etext06/">http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/etext06/</a> + + (Or /etext 05, 04, 03, 02, 01, 00, 99, + 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90) + +EBooks posted since November 2003, with etext numbers OVER #10000, are +filed in a different way. The year of a release date is no longer part +of the directory path. The path is based on the etext number (which is +identical to the filename). The path to the file is made up of single +digits corresponding to all but the last digit in the filename. For +example an eBook of filename 10234 would be found at: + +http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/1/0/2/3/10234 + +or filename 24689 would be found at: +http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/4/6/8/24689 + +An alternative method of locating eBooks: +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/GUTINDEX.ALL">http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/GUTINDEX.ALL</a> + +*** END: FULL LICENSE *** +</pre> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-005.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-005.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..8480152 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-005.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-006.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-006.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..1b9f072 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-006.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-011.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-011.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..db6a5ed --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-011.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-012.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-012.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..126c528 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-012.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-015.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-015.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..aba6c21 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-015.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-016.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-016.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..410e1ca --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-016.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-019.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-019.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..491f155 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-019.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-020.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-020.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..17a7a6d --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-020.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-022.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-022.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..6bdbb77 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-022.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-023.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-023.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..7df9723 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-023.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-024.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-024.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..6d3bc7a --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-024.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-025.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-025.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..7d1f0a6 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-025.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-026.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-026.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..b60936c --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-026.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-027.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-027.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..3f44d94 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-027.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-028.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-028.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..c4980d2 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-028.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-030.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-030.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..e722aa8 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-030.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-031.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-031.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..82e5f72 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-031.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-034.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-034.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..134e306 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-034.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-036.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-036.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d14584c --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-036.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-038.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-038.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..672bff1 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-038.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-039.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-039.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..b774f11 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-039.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-041.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-041.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..e31565c --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-041.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-041a.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-041a.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..c1133c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-041a.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-041b.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-041b.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..bf1e332 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-041b.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-044.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-044.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..14635f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-044.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-045.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-045.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..dfb2c95 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-045.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-048.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-048.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..b079d9a --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-048.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-049.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-049.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..f073300 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-049.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-051.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-051.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..59eee46 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-051.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-052.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-052.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..c5e6ac4 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-052.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-053.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-053.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..2682195 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-053.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-054.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-054.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..b1b3872 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-054.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-056.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-056.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..81205f7 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-056.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-057.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-057.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..0fea412 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-057.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-058.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-058.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..10bf490 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-058.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-060.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-060.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..c67382b --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-060.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-061.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-061.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..4946718 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-061.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-063.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-063.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..f72f822 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-063.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-064.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-064.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..139b772 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-064.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-067.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-067.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..2dee04b --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-067.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-068.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-068.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..89c9f09 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-068.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-071.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-071.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..4a0d009 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-071.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-072.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-072.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..0cb3664 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-072.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-074.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-074.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..1bf258c --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-074.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-075.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-075.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..db66bc7 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-075.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-076.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-076.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..7db33e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-076.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-078.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-078.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..61eb8b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-078.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-080.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-080.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..f352b80 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-080.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-083.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-083.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..759ae45 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-083.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-084.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-084.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..88f51e0 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-084.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-086.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-086.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..3cd315c --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-086.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-087.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-087.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..3ed7e4e --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-087.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-089.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-089.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..a1898a7 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-089.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-090.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-090.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..e2ead42 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-090.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-091.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-091.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..40864d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-091.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-092.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-092.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..65a0ae7 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-092.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-095.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-095.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..29bf31b --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-095.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-096.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-096.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..3460eca --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-096.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-098.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-098.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..6443602 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-098.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-100.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-100.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..af36792 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-100.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-102.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-102.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..2cbf607 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-102.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-103.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-103.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..bf99019 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-103.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-104.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-104.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..881874e --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-104.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-106.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-106.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..5dc6628 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-106.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-109.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-109.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..e638524 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-109.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-110.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-110.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..ec3b71d --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-110.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-112.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-112.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..78445bc --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-112.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-113.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-113.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..1459257 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-113.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-115.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-115.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..f572096 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-115.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-116.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-116.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..c21c78b --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-116.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-117.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-117.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d472249 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-117.jpg diff --git a/23991-h/images/i-118.jpg b/23991-h/images/i-118.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..0891a4d --- /dev/null +++ b/23991-h/images/i-118.jpg diff --git a/23991.txt b/23991.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..33d6834 --- /dev/null +++ b/23991.txt @@ -0,0 +1,3197 @@ +The Project Gutenberg eBook, Mission Furniture, by H. H. Windsor + + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + + + + +Title: Mission Furniture + How to Make It, Part 2 + + +Author: H. H. Windsor + + + +Release Date: December 25, 2007 [eBook #23991] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-646-US (US-ASCII) + + +***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK MISSION FURNITURE*** + + +E-text prepared by K. Nordquist, Ross Wilburn, and the Project Gutenberg +Online Distributed Proofreading Team (https://www.pgdp.net) + + + +Note: Project Gutenberg also has an HTML version of this + file which includes the original illustrations. + See 23991-h.htm or 23991-h.zip: + (https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/3/9/9/23991/23991-h/23991-h.htm) + or + (https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/3/9/9/23991/23991-h.zip) + + + + + +MISSION FURNITURE + +How To Make It + +PART TWO + +Popular Mechanics Handbooks + + + + + + + +Chicago +Popular Mechanics Company + +Copyrighted, 1910 +by H. H. Windsor + + + + +This book is one of the series of handbooks on industrial subjects being +published by the Popular Mechanics Co. Like the magazine, these books +are "written so you can understand it," and are intended to furnish +information on mechanical subjects at a price within the reach of all. + +The texts and illustrations have been prepared expressly for this +Handbook Series, by experts; are up-to-date, and have been revised by +the editor of Popular Mechanics. + +The dimensions given in the stock list contained in the description of +each piece of furniture illustrated in this book call for material +mill-planed, sanded and cut to length. If the workman desires to have a +complete home-made article, allowance must be made in the dimensions for +planing and squaring the pieces. S-4-S and S-2-S are abbreviations for +surface four sides and surface two sides. + + + +Contents + + AN OAK BUFFET, 5 + + OAK STAIN, 9 + + A PLAIN OAK HALL CLOCK, 10 + + A ROCKING CHAIR, 14 + + A CURVED BACK ARM CHAIR, 18 + + A PLATE RACK, 21 + + TOOL FOR MARKING DOWEL HOLES, 23 + + A MAGAZINE TABLE, 24 + + A WASTE PAPER BASKET, 27 + + AN OAK WRITING DESK, 29 + + AN OAK COUCH WITH CUSHIONS, 33 + + ELECTRIC SHADE FOR THE DINING ROOM, 37 + + HOW TO BEND WOOD, 40 + + A SMOKING STAND, 43 + + A CHINA CLOSET, 47 + + A LEATHER-COVERED FOOTSTOOL, 50 + + ARTS-CRAFTS MANTEL CLOCK, 52 + + A MUSIC STAND, 55 + + MAKING SCREWS HOLD IN THE END, 58 + + GRAIN OF WOOD, 58 + + A WALL CASE WITH A MIRROR DOOR, 59 + + A SIDE CHAIR, 62 + + AN ARM CHAIR, 66 + + A BOOKCASE, 70 + + A LAMP STAND, 73 + + AN EXTENSION DINING TABLE, 77 + + AN OAK-BOUND CEDAR CHEST, 79 + + A TOOL FOR MAKING MORTISES, 84 + + A DRESSER FOR CHILD'S PLAYROOM, 85 + + CUTTING TENONS WITH A HAND-SAW, 90 + + ARTS AND CRAFTS OIL LAMP, 91 + + ANOTHER CHINA CLOSET, 94 + + AN OAK BEDSTEAD, 99 + + AN OAK FOOTSTOOL, 101 + + A LIBRARY SET IN PYRO-CARVING, 105 + + A GRILLE WITH PEDESTALS TO MATCH, 107 + + A LADY'S WRITING DESK, 108 + + A TELEPHONE STAND AND STOOL, 112 + + HOW TO MAKE A DOWEL-CUTTING TOOL, 115 + + A MEDICINE CABINET, 116 + + + + +List of Illustrations + + Finished Buffet, 5 + + Details of Buffet, 5 + + Hall Clock Complete, 11 + + Details of Hall Clock, 11 + + Rocking Chair Complete, 15 + + Details of Rocking Chair, 15 + + Arm Chair Having Bent-Wood Back, 19 + + Details of Curved Back Arm Chair, 19 + + Parts Held Together by Keys, 22 + + Details of Plate Rack, 23 + + Marking Bore Holes for Dowels, 24 + + Table Complete, 25 + + Details of Magazine Table, 27 + + Illustration, 27 + + Illustration, 29 + + Detail of Writing Desk, 29 + + Writing Desk Complete, 31 + + Couch Complete, 34 + + Details of Mission Couch, 35 + + Details of Shade, 38 + + Electric Shade Complete, 39 + + Steaming Box, 41 + + Hose Attached to Teakettle, 41 + + Form Blocks, 41 + + Smoking Stand Details, 43 + + Finished Smoking Stand, 43 + + Details of China Closet, 47 + + China Closet Complete, 49 + + Footstool Leather Covered, 51 + + Details of Footstool, 52 + + Mantel Clock with Wood and Copper Front, 53 + + Details of Mantel Clock, 54 + + Details of Music Stand, 55 + + Music Stand Complete, 55 + + Illustration, 58 + + Wall Case Details, 60 + + Case with Mirror Door, 61 + + Side Chair Complete, 63 + + Details of Side Chair, 64 + + Arm Chair Complete, 67 + + Details of Chair, 68 + + Completed Bookcase, 70 + + Details of Bookcase, 70 + + Details of Lamp Stand, 74 + + Electric Lamp Stand Complete, 75 + + Extension Dining Table Complete, 77 + + Details of Dining Table, 77 + + Details of Cedar Chest, 79 + + Cedar Chest Complete, 83 + + Boring Holes for Tenons, 84 + + Details of Dresser, 85 + + Dresser Complete, 88 + + Drawer Construction, 89 + + Sawing Tenons, 91 + + Artistic Mission Style Oil Lamp, 91 + + Bronze Shade Holder, 91 + + China Closet with Latticework Doors and Sides, 96 + + Details of China Closet, 96 + + Oak Bedstead Complete, 99 + + Details of Oak Bedstead, 101 + + Details of Footstool, 103 + + Footstool Complete, 103 + + Table and Seat Decorated in Pyro-Carving, 105 + + Grille for an Arch, 107 + + Details of Writing Desk, 109 + + Desk Complete, 110 + + Stand and Stool Complete, 112 + + Details of Stand and Stool, 112 + + Easy Way to Make Dowels, 116 + + Medicine Cabinet Complete, 116 + + Details of Medicine Cabinet, 117 + + + + + +AN OAK BUFFET + + +[Illustration: Finished Buffet] + +[Illustration: Details of Buffet] + +The accompanying sketch and detail drawing show a design of a buffet +wherein refinement of outline and harmony of details are conspicuously +regarded. Quarter-sawed oak is the most suitable wood for this handsome +piece of mission furniture. The material should be ordered from the mill +ready cut to length, squared and sanded. Following is a list of the +stock needed: + + 2 back posts, 2 by 2 by 47-3/4 in. + 2 front posts, 2 by 2 by 45-1/2 in. + 4 rails, 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 50-1/2 in. + 2 end rails, 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 18-1/2 in. + 4 end rails, 3/4 by 4 by 18-1/2 in. + 4 pieces for end panel, 3/4 by 3-1/2 by 21 in. + 2 panels, 3/8 by 12 by 21 in. + 1 top board, 3/4 by 17-1/2 by 47-1/4 in. + 1 back board, 3/4 by 11-1/2 by 47-1/4 in. + 1 shelf board, 3/4 by 2 by 46 in. + 2 brackets, 1 by 2 by 7-3/4 in. + 4 pieces for doors, 3/4 by 4 by 11 in. + 2 panels, 3/8 by 11 by 17-1/2 in. + 1 piece for drawer, 3/4 by 8 by 22-1/2 in. + 1 piece for drawer, 3/4 by 7-1/2 by 22-1/2 in. + 1 piece for drawer, 3/4 by 7 by 22-1/2 in. + 2 pieces, 1/2 by 8 by 19-1/4 in.; soft wood. + 2 pieces, 1/2 by 7-1/2 by 19-1/4 in.; soft wood. + 2 pieces, 1/2 by 7 by 19-1/4 in.; soft wood. + 1 piece, 1/2 by 8 by 19-1/4 in.; soft wood. + 1 piece, 1/2 by 7-1/2 by 19-1/4 in.; soft wood. + 1 piece, 1/2 by 7 by 19-1/4 in.; soft wood. + 1 bottom board, 3/4 by 17-1/2 by 47-1/4 in.; soft wood. + 2 partitions (several pieces), 3/4 by 20 by 24-3/4 in. + 2 front pieces, 3/4 by 2 by 23 in. + 2 back pieces. 3/4 by 2 by 23 in.; soft wood. + 2 side pieces, 3/4 by 2 by 21-1/2 in.; soft wood. + 1 back (several pieces), 3/8 by 25 by 46 in. + 1 mirror frame (to suit mirror). + X/ + +Start to work on the four posts by squaring them up to the proper length +in pairs and beveling the tops as shown. Clamp all four pieces on a flat +surface with the bottom ends even, then lay out the mortises for the +rails and panels on all four pieces at once with a try-square. This +insures getting the mortises all the same height. The back posts also +have a mortise cut in them at the top for the back board as shown. Lay +out the tenons on the ends of the front and back rails in the same +manner. Cut them to fit the mortises in the posts, also rabbet the back +rails for the backing. Cut tenons on the end rails and rabbet them and +the side pieces for the panels. + +Lay out the top and bottom boards to the proper size and notch the +corners to fit about the posts. These boards are fastened to the +1-1/2-in. square rails with dowels and glue. They can now be glued +together and set away to dry. The top board is of oak, and be sure to +get the best side up, while the bottom one can be made of soft wood if +desired. + +The partitions are made of several boards glued together. Be careful to +get an oak board on the outer edge. The drawer slides are set into the +partitions as shown and are fastened in place with screws from the +inside. + +The top back board has a tenon on each end that fits into the mortises +in the back posts and is rounded at the top as shown. The shelf is also +rounded at the ends and is fastened to the back with screws. + +A plate glass mirror should be provided for the back. This is fitted to +the back board as shown, then the brackets put up at the ends of the +mirror frame. + +The main parts are now ready to be assembled and glued together. Before +applying any glue, see that all the joints fit together perfectly. The +end rails and the panels are glued together first and allowed to dry. Be +very careful to get the parts clamped together perfectly square and +straight, else you will have trouble later on. When these ends are dry +slip them on the tenons on the front and back rails which are already +fastened to the top and bottom boards. + +The back board and the partitions must be in place when this is done. +Pin and glue the joints and clamp the whole together square and leave to +dry. + +The doors are now made by mortising the top and bottom pieces to take +the 3/8-in. panel which is glued in place. The drawers are made as shown +in the sketch. The front board should be oak, but the remainder can be +made of soft wood. The joints are nailed and glued. Suitable hinges for +the doors and handles for the drawers should be provided. Antique copper +trimmings look very well with this style of furniture and can be secured +at most any hardware store. + +The back is made of soft wood and is put on in the usual manner. Scrape +all surplus glue from about the joints, as stain will not take where +there is any glue. Finish smooth with fine sandpaper, then apply the +stain you like best. This can be any one of the many mission stains +supplied by the trade for this purpose. + + + + +OAK STAIN + + +An easy and at the same time a good way to stain oak in imitation of the +fumed effect, is to boil catechu in the proportion of 1/4 lb. to 6 lb. +of water, after which cool and strain. Apply this to the wood, and when +dry treat with a solution of bichromate of potash in the same proportion +as with the catechu. Bichromate of potash alone in water will give a +good stain. A solution of 2 oz. of pearl ash and 2 oz. of potash mixed +in a quart of water makes a good stain. Potash solution darkens the +wood, and when applied very strong will produce an almost ebon hue, due +to what we might describe as the burning of the wood fiber. + + + + +A PLAIN OAK HALL CLOCK + + +The hall clock shown in the illustration should be made of plain oak. +The following pieces will be needed to make it: + + 2 back posts, 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 81 in., S-4-S. + 2 front posts, 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 21 in., S-4-S. + 2 front posts, 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 44 in., S-4-S. + 10 front and back horizontals, 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 15 in., S-4-S. + 10 side horizontals, 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 11 in., S-4-S. + 1 face, 3/8 by 14 by 14 in., S-4-S. + +FRONT DOORS + + 4 rails, 3/4 by 1-1/2 by 18 in., S-4-S. + 4 stiles, 3/4 by 1-1/2 by 12 in., S-4-S. + 4 horizontal mullions, 3/16 by 3/4 by 11 in., S-4-S. + 4 horizontal mullions, 3/16 by 5/8 by 11 in., S-4-S. + 4 vertical mullions, 3/16 by 3/4 by 15 in., S-4-S. + 2 vertical mullions, 3/16 by 5/8 by 15 in., S-4-S. + +BACK + + 1 piece, 3/8 by 14 by 21 in., S-4-S. + 2 pieces, 3/8 by 14 by 18 in., S-4-S. + 4 horizontal mullions, 3/16 by 5/8 by 14 in., S-4-S. + 4 vertical mullions, 3/16 by 5/8 by 20 in., S-4-S. + +TOP SIDE PANELS + + 2 pieces, 3/8 by 9-1/2 by 14 in., S-4-S. + 8 horizontal mullions, 3/16 by 5/8 by 9-1/2 in., S-4-S. + 6 vertical mullions, 3/16 by 5/8 by 14 in., S-4-S. + 2 middle side panels, 3/4 by 9-1/2 by 20 in., S-2-S. + +LOWER SIDE PANELS + + 8 vertical mullions, 3/16 by 3/4 by 18 in., S-4-S. + 8 vertical mullions, 3/16 by 5/8 by 18 in., S-4-S. + 8 horizontal mullions, 3/16 by 3/4 by 9-1/2 in., S-4-S. + 8 horizontal mullions, 3/16 by 5/8 by 9-1/2 in., S-4-S. + +If the worker will take the trouble to combine the different lengths of +pieces having like thicknesses and widths into pieces of standard +lengths, he will be able to save himself some expense at the mill with +no more work for himself. + +Begin work by shaping the ends of the posts as indicated in the drawing. +Lay out and cut the mortises for the tenons of the horizontals or rails. +These mortises need not be deep if the joints are to be reinforced later +with lag screws as is the clock shown. They may be what are known as +stub tenons and mortises. The tenons are not more than 1/2 in. long, +just enough to keep the rail from turning about. + +Next lay out and cut the tenons on the rails. Bore the holes for the lag +screws, being careful to bore on adjacent surfaces so that the holes +will miss each other. Use a 3/8 by 3-in. lag screw, boring the hole in +the tenon with a 1/4-in. bit the full depth the screw is to enter. + +The side panels should be fitted into grooves in the rails, and before +the frame is put together these panels should be squared up and the +grooves cut in the rails and posts at the proper places. + +[Illustration: Hall Clock Complete] + +[Illustration: Details of Hall Clock] + +The mullions of the lower side panels, it will be noted, are specified +5/8 and 3/4 in. wide. The 5/8-in. pieces are for the central parts of +the frame and the others for the outside. The frame is to be made 1/8 +in. larger all around than the distance between the posts and between +the rails so that it may be set in grooves cut in the posts and the +rails to a similar depth, 1/8 in. This is true, also, of the mullions of +the front doors. Square up the shelves so that they may be set into +grooves in the adjacent rails. The middle shelf is to have an overhang +and will rest upon the rails. + +The mullions of the top side panels are all of the same width, and it is +not intended or necessary to set their frame into grooves in the posts. +The wood panel back of them gives ample strength. + +It is a good plan not to groove the panel upon which the figures are +placed, and which becomes the face of the clock. It is better to fit +this piece in and fasten metal or wood buttons on the back side so that +it can be readily taken off to get at the clock movement from the front. + +Make the doors, tenoning the rails into the stiles and grooving both to +receive the mullioned framework of 3/16-in. stuff. + +Put the whole frame together, using good hot glue for the joints. When +the glue has dried sufficiently to allow the clamps to be taken off, fit +the doors and hinge them. Butterfly surface hinges look well and are the +easiest to apply. + +Thoroughly scrape all the surplus glue off and sandpaper the parts +preparatory to applying the finish. + +To finish, apply one coat of mission oak water stain. When dry, +sandpaper lightly, using No. 00 paper. Apply a second coat, diluted with +an equal amount of water. Sand this lightly and put on a very thin coat +of shellac to keep the filler color, which follows, from discoloring the +high lights. When the shellac has had time to harden, sand lightly and +put on a coat of paste filler. Use light filler, colored with umber and +Venetian red in the proportion of 12 oz, of umber, and 4 oz. of red to +20 lb. of filler. The directions for applying the filler will be found +on the can labels. On the hardened filler apply a thin coat of shellac. +Sand the shellac lightly and put on several coats of some good floor +wax, polishing well according to the directions on the can. This is what +is known as a mission oak finish and is quite popular for this type of +furniture design. + +The metal figures for the dial come with the clock movement. Some of the +movements come already set in boxes of wood so that all one needs to do +is to shape the projecting ends of the wood containing boxes and fasten +them to the frame with screws from the back. A clock with dial figures, +eight-day movement, striking the hours and half hours, with cathedral +gong can be bought for $4, possibly less. + + + + +A ROCKING CHAIR + + +In furniture construction such as this, nothing is gained by trying to +plane up the stock out of the rough. This is mere drudgery and can be +more cheaply and easily done at the planing mill by machinery. There +will be plenty to do to cut and fit all the different parts. Order the +pieces mill-planed and sandpapered to the sizes specified below. + +Plain sawed red oak takes a mission finish nicely and is appropriate. +Some people like quartered white oak better, however. The cost is about +the same. + +The stock for the chair is as follows: Widths and thicknesses are +specified exact except for the rear posts and the rockers; but to the +lengths enough surplus stock has been added to allow for squaring the +ends. + + 2 front posts, 1-5/8 by 2-1/4 by 22-1/2 in., S-4-S. + 2 back posts, 1-5/8 by 11 by 40 in., S-2-S. + 1 front horizontal, 3/4 by 3-1/2 by 22 in., S-4-S. + 1 back horizontal, 3/4 by 3-1/2 by 20 in., S-4-S. + 2 back horizontals, 3/4 by 3-1/2 by 20 in., S-4-S. + 2 side horizontals, 3/4 by 3-1/2 by 20 in., S-4-S. + 2 back slats, 5/16 by 3-1/2 by 20 in., S-4-S. + 2 arms, 1 by 4-1/2 by 25 in., S-2-S. + 1 rocker, 2-1/4 by 6 by 33 in., S-2-S. + 5 bottom slats, 3/4 by 2-1/2 by 19-1/2 in., S-4-S. + +[Illustration: Rocking Chair Complete] + +[Illustration: Details of Rocking Chair] + +Begin work on the posts first. The front posts should have one end of +each squared, after which they can be cut to the exact length. The +rear posts, according to the stock bill, are specified for the exact +thickness. By exercising forethought, both may be got from the piece +ordered. The tops and bottoms of the posts should have their edges +slightly chamfered to prevent their slivering. + +The shape of the arm is a little out of the ordinary, but the drawing +indicates quite clearly how it is cut. The arm is fastened to the posts +by means of dowels and glue after the other parts of the chair have been +put together. + +Now prepare the curved parts of the back. These parts are worked to +size, after which they are thoroughly steamed and bent in the forms +described on another page. These forms should have a surface curve whose +radius is 22 in. While the parts are drying out, go ahead with the +cutting of the mortises and tenons of post and rail. + +Inasmuch as the width of the front of the chair exceeds that of the back +by 2 in., allowance must be made for slant either in the tenons of the +side rails or in the mortises. This will necessitate the use of the +bevel in laying off the shoulders of the tenons. + +The slats for the bottom are made long enough so that their ends may be +"let into" the front and back rails, a 3/4-in. groove being plowed to +receive them. + +Assemble the back, then the front; and when the glue on them has dried, +put the side rails in place, then the arms. The chair should now be +scraped and sandpapered preparatory to applying the finish. + +The cushion shown in the picture is made of Spanish roan skin leather +and is filled with elastic felt. Such cushions can be purchased at the +upholsterer's or they can be made by the craftsman himself. Frequently +the two parts of the cushion are laced together by means of leather +thongs. + + + + +A CURVED BACK ARM CHAIR + + +The arm chair, the picture and drawing of which is given herewith is a +companion piece to the rocker described on another page. + +With the exception of the back-legs the stock bill which follows gives +the thicknesses and widths exact. To the length, however, enough has +been added to allow squaring up the ends. + +Plain sawed white or red oak will be suitable for a design such as this. + + Front posts, 2 pieces, 1-5/8 by 2-1/4 by 26 in., S-4-S. + Back posts, 1 piece, 1-5/8 by 8 by 45 in., S-2-S. + Front horizontals, 2 pieces, 3/4 by 3-1/2 by 21-1/2 in., S-4-S. + Rear horizontals, 4 pieces, 3/4 by 3-1/2 by 19-1/4 in., S-4-S. + Side horizontals, 4 pieces, 3/4 by 3-1/2 by 19-1/2 in., S-4-S. + Back slats, 2 pieces, 5/16 by 3-1/2 by 19-1/2 in., S-4-S. + Arms, 2 pieces, 1-1/8 by 4 by 24 in., S-4-S. + Seat slats, 5 pieces, 1/2 by 2-1/4 by 20 in., S-4-S. + +Begin work by squaring up the ends of the front posts and shaping the +rear ones Chamfer the ends of the tops and bottoms slightly so that they +shall not splinter through usage. Next lay out the mortises and tenons. + +The curved horizontals for the back should now be prepared and steamed +as described on another page. The curved form to which the steamed piece +is to be clamped to give shape to it should be curved slightly more than +is wanted in the piece, as the piece when released will tend to +straighten a little. + +The arms of the chair may be shaped while these pieces are drying on the +forms. The rails of the front and back may be tenoned, too. It should +be noted that the front of the chair is wider than the back. This will +necessitate care in mortising and tenoning the side rails so as to get +good fits for the shoulders The bevel square will be needed in laying +out the shoulders of the tenons. + +[Illustration: Arm Chair Having Bent-Wood Back] + +[Illustration: Details of Curved Back Arm Chair] + +Assemble the back, then the front. When the glue has hardened on these +parts so that the clamps may be removed, put in the side rails or +horizontals and again adjust the clamps. The arms are to be fastened +to the posts with dowels and glue. + +The seat, it will be seen from the drawing, is to be a loose leather +cushion to rest upon slats. These seat slats may be fastened to cleats +which have been previously fastened to the inside of the front and back +seat rails or they may be "let in" to these rails by grooving their +inner surfaces before the rails have been put in place. The latter +method is more workmanlike, but more difficult. + +A cushion such as is shown can be purchased ready made up, or it may be +made by the amateur by lacing together two pieces of Spanish leather cut +to size and punched along the edges so as to allow a lacing of leather +thong. It may be filled with hair or elastic felt such as upholsterers +use. + +Probably the simplest finish that can be used is weathered oak. Put on a +coat of weather oak oil stain, sandpaper lightly when dry and then put +on a very thin coat of shellac. Sand this lightly and follow with two or +more coats of floor wax put on in very thin coatings and polished well. + + + + +A PLATE RACK + + +The plate rack shown in the accompanying illustration is designed for +use in a room furnished in mission style. The dimensions may be changed +to suit the wall space. The parts are held together entirely by keys. +The bar across the front is for keeping the plates from falling out, but +this may be left out if the plates are allowed to lean against the wall. + +The following list of material will be needed, and, if the builder does +not care to do the rough work, the stock can be ordered planed, sanded +and cut to the exact size of the dimensions given. + + 2 ends, 7/8 by 5 by 20 in. + 1 top, 7/8 by 6 by 36 in. + 1 shelf, 7/8 by 5 by 36 in. + 1 bar, 7/8 in. square by 36 in. + 4 keys. Scrap pieces will do. + +Lay out and cut the mortises on the end pieces for the tenons of the +shelf, also the tenons on the top ends and the diamond shaped openings. +In laying these out, work from the back edge of the pieces. Cut the +tenons on the ends of the shelf to fit the mortises in the end pieces, +numbering each one so the parts can be put together with the tenons in +the proper mortises. Mark out and cut the mortises in the top to receive +the tenons on the end pieces. + +[Illustration: Parts Held Together by Keys] + +In laying out the mortises for the keys allow a little extra on the side +toward the shoulder so the ends and tops may be drawn up tightly when +the keys are driven in the mortises. All the mortises and diamond +shaped openings should be marked and cut with a chisel from both sides +of the board. + +If the bar is used, it may be attached with a flat side or edge out as +shown. + +[Illustration: Details of Plate Rack] + +Finish the pieces separately with any weathered or fumed oak stain. When +thoroughly dry, apply a very thin coat of shellac. Finish with two coats +of wax. The rack can be attached to the wall by two mirror plates +fastened on the back edges of the end pieces. + + + + +TOOL FOR MARKING DOWEL HOLES + + +On some work it is quite difficult to locate the exact point for a +dowel, but with the tool illustrated placed between the joint to be made +and the parts gently pressed together you have the exact point for the +dowel in each piece. The tool is made from a piece of sheet steel about +1/2 in. square with a pin having a point on both ends driven in the +center, as shown in Fig. 1. The tool is placed between the pieces that +are to be joined, as shown in Fig. 2. The small pin will mark the point +for the bit in both pieces exactly opposite. + +[Illustration: Marking Bore Holes for Dowels] + + + + +A MAGAZINE TABLE + + +This little magazine table will be found a very useful piece of +furniture for the den or library. Its small size permits it to be set +anywhere in a room without being in the way. Quarter-sawed oak should be +used in its construction, and the following pieces will be needed: + + 4 legs, 2 by 2 by 29 in., S-4-S. + 4 end slats, 1/2 by 2 by 10 in., S-4-S. + 1 shelf, 1 by 16 by 30 in., S-1-S. + 1 top board, 1 by 18 by 36 in., S-1-S. + +If you are convenient to a planing mill you can secure these pieces +ready cut to length, squared and sanded. This will save you considerable +labor. + +The four legs are finished on all sides and chamfered at the bottom to +prevent the corners from splitting. The mortises for the shelf should +be cut 9 in. from the top of each leg, as shown in the sketch. Care +should be taken to make these a perfect fit. + +[Illustration: Table Complete] + +The shelf should be finished on the top side and the four edges, and the +corners cut out to fit the mortises in the table legs. An enlarged view +of this joint is shown in the sketch. + +The top board may have to be made of two 9-in. boards, dove-tailed and +glued together. It should be finished on the top side and the edges. The +edges can be beveled if desired. The board is fastened to the legs by +means of screws through four small brass angles. These angles can be +made or they can be purchased at any hardware store. + +[Illustration: Details of Magazine Table] + +The top board and the shelf should be mortised at each end for the 1/2 +by 2-in. slats. These slats should be finished on all sides. + +The table is now ready to be assembled and glued together. The glue +should dry at least 24 hours before the clamps are removed. + +After the glue is dry, carefully go over the entire table with fine +sandpaper and remove all surplus glue and rough spots. It can now be +finished in any one of the mission stains which are supplied by the +trade for this purpose. + + + + +A WASTE PAPER BASKET + + +A waste paper basket of pleasing design, and very easy to construct, is +shown in the accompanying sketch. Quarter-sawed oak is the best wood to +use, and it is also the easiest to obtain. The following pieces will be +needed: + + 1 bottom piece, 3/4 by 9 in. square. + 4 corner pieces, 3/4 in. square by 15-1/2 in. + 4 top rails, 3/4 in. square by 7-1/2 in. + 12 slats, 1/4 by 3/4 by 16-1/4 in. + 4 blocks, 1 in. square. + 4 F.H. screws, 2-1/2 in. long. + 24 R.H. screws, 3/4 in. long. + +[Illustration: A WASTE PAPER BASKET] + +If the pieces are ordered from the mill cut to length, squared and +sanded, much labor will be saved. First bevel the ends of the corner +posts and the slats, as shown, and finish them with sandpaper. Bore the +holes in the posts and the railing for the dowel pins. These pins should +be about 3/8 in. in diameter and 3/4 in. long. When this is done the +parts can be glued together and laid aside to dry. The four blocks 1 in. +square are for the feet. Bore holes through these blocks and the corners +of the bottom board for the large screws to go through. Fasten them +together by running the screws through the blocks, and the board into +the ends of the corner posts as shown in the sketch. The 1/4-in. slats +can now be fastened on with the small round-headed screws. They should +be evenly spaced on the four sides. This completes the basket except for +the finish. This can be any one of the many finishes supplied by the +trade for this purpose. + +[Illustration: DETAILS OF WASTE PAPER BASKET] + + + + +AN OAK WRITING DESK + + +For the writing desk shown in the accompanying picture the following +stock will be needed. The thicknesses of all the pieces are specified. +On the legs the widths, too, are specified. Quarter-sawed white oak is +the best wood to use, and it should be well seasoned and clear of shakes +and other imperfections. + +STOCK BILL + + 2 front posts, 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 by 34 in., S-4-S., oak. + 2 back posts, 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 by 42 in., S-4-S., oak. + 2 lower side rails, 3/4 by 3-1/4 by 15 in., S-2-S., oak. + 1 lower back rail, 3/4 by 3-1/4 by 27 in., S-2-S., oak. + 2 sides, 3/4 by 9 by 14 in., S-2-S., oak. + 2 sides, 3/4 by 10-1/2 by 14 in., S-2-S., oak. + 1 back, 3/4 by 9 by 26 in., S-2-S., oak. + 1 back, 3/4 by 10-1/2 by 26 in., S-2-S., oak. + 1 top, 3/4 by 6 by 30-in., S-2-S., oak. + 1 lid, 3/4 by 15 by 28 in., S-2-S., oak. + 2 side shelves, 3/4 by 5 by 16 in., S-2-S., oak. + 4 braces, 3/4 by 1-1/4 by 9 in., S-2-S., oak. + 1 bottom of case, 3/4 by 16 by 28 in., S-2-S., oak. + +INTERIOR + + 1 piece, 3/4 by 16 by 27 in., S-2-S., oak. + 4 drawer and case bottom supports, 3/4 by 2-1/2 by 28 in., S-2-S., oak. + 6 drawer and case bottom supports, 3/4 by 2-1/2 by 16 in., S-2-S., oak. + 4 drawer guides, 3/4 by 3/4 by 16 in., S-2-S., oak. + +DRAWERS + + 2 front pieces, 3/4 by 7-1/2 by 13 in., S-2-S., oak. + 4 side pieces, 3/8 by 7-1/2 by 16 in., S-2-S., poplar. + 2 back pieces, 3/8 by 7 by 12 in., S-2-S., poplar. + 2 bottom pieces, 3/8 by 16 by 12 in., S-2-S., poplar. + +PIGEON HOLES + + 1 bottom, 3/16 by 7-1/4 by 27 in., S-2-S., poplar. + 1 top, 3/16 by 4-1/2 by 27 in., S-2-S., poplar. + 4 verticals, 3/16 by 7-1/4 by 10 in., S-2-S., poplar. + 1 vertical, 3/16 by 4-1/2 by 4 in., S-2-S., poplar. + 5 horizontals, 3/16 by 7-1/2 by 9 in., S-2-S., poplar. + 2 horizontals, 4-1/2 by 9 in., S-2-S., poplar. + +DRAWERS IN PIGEON HOLES + + 2 front, 3/8 by 2-1/4 by 9 in., S-2-S., poplar. + 4 sides, 3/16 by 2-1/4 by 7-1/4 in., S-2-S., poplar. + 2 backs, 3/16 by 2-1/4 by 9 in., S-2-S., poplar. + 2 bottoms, 3/16 by 7-1/4 by 9 in., S-2-S., poplar. + +[Illustration: Detail of Writing Desk] + +Begin work by cutting the posts to length and shape. Having done this, +lay out the tenons on the lower rails so as to have the required +distances between the shoulders, and then cut them. Now cut the parts +to be worked into the frames that support the drawer and bottom of the +case, and glue them properly. While this is drying, the other parts of +the case may be laid out and shaped. It is intended that the sides of +the case shall splice on the edge of the bottom of the pigeon hole case. +In this manner the side shelves will cover the joint on either end. The +back may be made up into one solid piece. Make the side pieces of the +case long enough to be housed into the posts about 3/8 in. at each end. + +[Illustration: Writing Desk Complete] + +The shelves at the ends of the desk should be fastened after the frame +is put together and before the bottom of the case for the pigeon holes +is fitted and fastened. In so doing the shelves may be fastened from the +inside of the case. The angles of the braces are 30-60 deg. It will be +noted that the edges of the lid are rabbeted. Another way is to have the +lid large enough to fit entirely over the sides of the case and change +the slope to correspond. + +The drawers may be made next. The fronts should be of oak, but the other +parts of yellow poplar. An examination of an ordinary drawer will show +the manner of construction. + +Make the frame of the pigeon holes of 3/16-in. yellow poplar. The +drawing shows an arrangement entirely independent of the sides of the +desk so that the frame can be made and slipped in place after the finish +has been put on. Two drawers are shown. These are faced front and back +alike so as to secure as much room in the drawer as possible. + +In the finishing, the poplar wood should be finished with white shellac +in the natural light color of the wood. For the oak parts the following +is appropriate for this design: Apply one coat of green Flemish water +stain. When this has dried, sandpaper lightly until the raised grain has +been removed, and apply another coat of stain diluted one-half with +water. When dry, sand lightly and apply a very thin coat of shellac. +Sand lightly and apply a coat of dark filler, natural filler colored +with lamp-black, according to the somberness of the finish desired. Upon +this put a coat of orange shellac. After this, put on two coats of a +good rubbing varnish. Rub the first coats with curled hair or haircloth +and the last with pulverized pumice stone and raw linseed oil or crude +oil. + + + + +AN OAK COUCH WITH CUSHIONS + + +This beautiful piece of mission furniture can be made at a very moderate +cost, if the material used for the cushions is of good imitation +leather. These substitutes for leather last fully as long and the +difference can only be detected by an expert. White oak will give the +best results except for the frames or slats on which the cushions rest +and these may be made of poplar or pine. If a mill or woodworking shop +of any kind is handy, the hardest part of the work can be saved by +securing the following list of material, cut, planed, sanded and squared +up to the exact sizes given: + + 2 posts, 3 in. square by 17 in. + 2 posts, 3 in. square by 26 in. + 2 rails, 7/8 by 8 by 82 in. + 1 rail, 7/8 by 8 by 25 in. + 1 end, 7/8 by 18 by 25 in. + 1 piece, 7/8 by 9 by 24-1/2 in. + +The last piece on the list when sawed diagonal makes the two slanting +pieces at the head of the couch. The corner braces are made from two +pieces of straight-grained oak, 2 by 4-1/2 by 4-1/2 in., sawed on the +diagonal, and cut as shown in the enlarged plan section to make the four +pieces. + +First be sure the legs are perfectly square, the two short ones and the +two long ones of equal length respectively. Either chamfer or round the +upper ends as desired, chisel and plane the taper on the lower ends. Lay +out and cut all the tenons on the rails--1 in. is the amount allowed at +each end in the stock dimensions given. Arrange the posts and rails in +the positions they are to occupy in the finished couch. Number each +tenon and the place its corresponding mortise is to be cut in the post. +Mark each mortise directly from the tenon which is to fit into it, +taking care to have all the rails an equal distance from the floor. Bore +and chisel out all mortises and see that all the rails fit perfectly, +before proceeding with the work. + +[Illustration: Couch Complete] + +The next step will be to fit in the slanting side pieces at the head of +the couch. These must be let into the long posts 1/2 in. and held also +by a dowel in the side rail. In order to get these pieces into place, +the mortise in the long post must be made 1/2 in. longer than the tenon +on the sloping side piece so the tenon may be first pushed into the +mortise and then the side clamped down on the rail over the dowel. The +whole couch should fit together perfectly before gluing any of the +parts. + +Glue the end parts together first. Hot glue will hold best if the room +and lumber are warm; if these cannot be had, use cold glue. After the +ends have set for at least 24 hours, glue in place the side rails and +slanting head pieces. Screw in place the corner braces. Be sure when +making these braces to have the grain running diagonally across the +corner, or the brace will be weak, also, be sure the sides are square +with the ends; this may be determined by measuring the diagonals to find +if they are equal. + +If it is decided to use frames for the cushions, then the following +material will be necessary: + + 2 pieces, 7/8 by 2 by 56 in. + 2 pieces, 7/8 by 2 by 25 in. + 4 pieces 7/8 by 2 by 21 in. + +This material may be of pine or poplar. These pieces are made into two +frames as shown in the drawing and held together with long screws or +nails. Fasten with glue and screw short blocks on the inside of the +couch rails for holding the two frames in place. Tack pieces of cheap +burlap across the frame and cover with ordinary black cambric. This will +give a strong, springy rest for the cushions. + +Should slats be used instead of frames for holding the cushions, then +the following list of material should be substituted for the frame +material list: + + 2 cleats, 7/8 by 2 by 56 in. + 2 cleats, 7/8 by 2 by 25 in. + 12 slats, 3/4 by 5 by 25 in. + +[Illustration: Details of Mission Couch] + +The materials listed may be of soft wood the same as for the frame. The +cleats are fastened to the inside of the rails of the couch with +screws, so the top edge will be 2 in. lower than the top edge of the +rails. The slats are spaced evenly on these cleats. + +After the glue is all set, remove the clamps and scrape off any glue +that may be on the wood. If this glue is not removed it will keep the +stain from entering the wood, which will show up when finished in white +spots. + +This couch may be stained in any of the shades of brown or dark to +harmonize with its lines of construction. A water stain will penetrate +the wood best and after this is applied and thoroughly dried the surface +should be well sanded to remove the roughness of the raised grain. Apply +one coat of thin shellac and when this is dry, put on two coats of wax. + +In making up the cushions, use either hair or elastic felt for the +filling. + + + + +ELECTRIC SHADE FOR THE DINING ROOM + + +The dining shade shown is constructed of wood and glass. There will be +needed the following: + + 8 pieces, 3/4 by 3/4 by 24 in., S-4-S, oak. + 4 pieces, 3/4 by 3/4 by 4 in., S-4-S, oak. + 4 pieces, 3/4 by 3/4 by 10-1/2 in., S-4-S, oak. + 4 pieces, 3/8 by 3/4 by 23 in., S-4-S, oak. + 8 pieces, 3/8 by 3/4 by 10 in., S-4-S, oak. + 4 pieces, 3/8 by 3/4 by 9 in., S-4-S, oak. + 1 piece, 3/4 by 8 by 8 in., S-4-S, oak. + +Begin work by shaping the ends of the longest pieces as shown in the +drawing. All the angles are 45 deg. Next lay out the cross-lap joints at +the corners so that two sets of horizontal frames shall be formed 23 by +23 in. Cut four pieces to a length of 3 in. each. Also shape up the +"false" extensions of these pieces which are to be fastened below the +lower frame at the corners. Since these are to be cut from the pieces +just specified, the easiest way is to shape the end of each to the +required angle and then crosscut. Rabbet these pieces sufficient to +allow the art glass to set in on the back sides and be fastened--about +1/4 in. will do--and put them together with glue and brads. + +[Illustration: Details of Shade] + +Now make the top square in a similar manner, except the rabbets. In this +top square is to be fitted the 3/4-in. board which is to hold the lights +and to which the chains are to be fastened. + +The sloping sides are next to be made. The sides are to be built up +separately, the corners being lapped and glued after rabbeting the under +arrises sufficient to let the glass in. The four sides are mitered +together at their edges and reinforced by covering the joint with +copper. + +These sides are next mitered to the top and bottom frames and made fast +on the under sides with copper strips, glue being used on the edges of +the wood. + +The shade shown had a mottled glass in which greens predominated. The +sizes and shapes of these pieces of glass would better be determined +after the woodwork is finished. + +[Illustration: Electric Shade Complete] + +One manner of fastening the chains is clearly shown in the photograph. +Such a combination will call for an extra piece of oak, 3/4 by 3-1/4 by +3-1/4 in. finished stock. + +A good finish for this shade is obtained as follows: Put on a coat of +silver gray water stain. When this has dried, sand lightly with No. 00 +sandpaper and apply a coat of golden oak oil stain. Allow this to dry +after wiping the surplus off with a cloth. Put on a coat of black paste +filler and allow to harden over night. When dry, sand lightly and put on +a coat of very thin shellac. Sand this lightly when hard and put on a +coat of wax. This is a very dark finish relieved by high lights of +lighter brown and is known as Antwerp oak. + + + + +HOW TO BEND WOOD + + +The process for making bent wood for furniture parts is the same as for +any other kind of bent-wood work. The pieces should be made close to the +size, with only enough material left on them for "cleaning up" after the +bending has been done. The pieces used for the bent work should be good, +clean, "live" lumber. Lumber dried on the stump will not bend. + +A box must be made in which to steam the pieces of wood to be bent. A +design of a steaming box is shown in the illustration. Such a box is +made by nailing four boards together into a square or rectangular form, +the boards having a length sufficient to take in the length of the +furniture parts to be bent. Both ends of the finished box are squared up +and closed with a board cut to the size, using felt or gunny sack in the +joint to make it as tight as possible. These ends can be nailed on, but +it is best to hold them with a bar of metal set against each one. +Nailing the ends a few times would spoil the box for further use in +steaming. + +[Illustration: STEAMING BOX] + +[Illustration: HOSE ATTACHED TO TEAKETTLE.] + +[Illustration: FORM BLOCKS] + +A good teakettle will serve the purpose for a steam generator. A hose is +attached to the spout of the teakettle, as shown in the illustration, +and to the steaming box in a like manner. The steaming box should be +provided with a short piece of gas pipe turned into a hole bored into +one of the sides used for the top on which to attach the hose. A small +hole should be bored into one side of one end of the steaming box, and +this end should be arranged a trifle lower than the other end. The hole +will permit the water of condensation to escape. Steam should not escape +from the box when a charge of wood is being softened. Steam which +escapes from the box in the form of vapor has done no work whatever, and +is just so much waste of fuel. In order to give up its heat to the wood, +the steam must condense and come away from the box as water. Therefore, +in steaming a charge of pieces in the box, never crowd the teakettle so +hard that the steam escapes around the heads of the box or through any +other joints. The steam should be supplied to the box just as fast as it +condenses, and no faster. When the pieces are placed in the box they +should be so arranged that the steam can find ready access to all sides +of each piece. + +The curve or bend of the piece to be made must be marked out on a wide +board or on the floor. Nail down several blocks of wood or pieces cut +out like brackets on the board or floor against the drawing, as shown in +the illustration. The wood is sprung between these blocks or forms after +it has been softened by steam. When taking the steamed pieces from the +box do not lose any time in securing them to the forms. Do not take out +more than one piece at a time, as it must be bent to the forms +immediately after taking it from the hot steam. The time of the steaming +will vary with the size of the pieces. Small strips may be steamed in 15 +or 20 minutes, while large ones may require several hours to become soft +enough to bend. The pieces must be left in the forms until they are +thoroughly dry. + + + + +A SMOKING STAND + + +When making the smoking stand shown in the accompanying photograph, use +quarter-sawed oak, if possible, as this wood is the most suitable for +finishing in the different mission stains. This little piece of +furniture is very attractive, easy to construct, and is an article that +a smoker would appreciate. + +If the stock is purchased finished and sandpapered, it will save much of +the hard work. The material needed is as follows: + + One piece, 7/8 by 12 in. by 9 ft. long, for the legs. + One piece, 7/8 by 10 in. by 4 ft. long, for the top. + One piece, 7/8 by 8 in. by 1 ft. long, for the shelves. + One piece, 1/2 by 2 in. by 6 ft. long, for the pipe rack. + +The legs can be made first. Cut four pieces off the 12-in. board, each +exactly 25 in. long, and lay each one out with a pair of compasses as +shown in the detail drawing at Fig. 1. With a circle or keyhole saw cut +out the piece, then shave out the saw marks and sandpaper smooth. + +[Illustration: Smoking Stand Details] + +[Illustration: Finished Smoking Stand] + +Next take the 8-in. board and make the shelves. Set a bevel protractor +at a 45-deg. angle, lay out the pieces as shown in Fig. 5, and cut them +out with a saw. Eight pieces are cut out as shown in Fig. 4. These +pieces can be cut out of the scraps left from cutting the legs and +shelves. Cut them so that the grain runs the long way. Place two of +these braces on the bench with the beveled ends toward each other, but +with a piece of 7/8-in. stock between them, and the other two beveled +ends resting against a straightedge. Fasten them to the bench with a +couple of nails, leaving the heads sticking up so that you can pull them +later with a claw hammer. Remove the straightedge and slide the piece +that is between the braces along until it projects 4 or 5 in. from the +side formed by the straightedge. Then place two more braces in the +corners formed by this piece, put two 7/8-in. pieces between the two +braces that are fastened, and the two that are loose, so that each brace +will be in its proper place. Fasten the last two the same as the first +pair. Then remove all the pieces from between the braces and place the +tops of the legs in their stead. These should be fastened to the braces +with 1-in. screws of small diameter, put in at an angle. Bore a hole in +straight for about 1/4-in. with a 1/4-in. bit for each screw, and then +run a gimlet at an angle into the leg. After you have the legs fastened +to the first set of braces, measure up from the bench 10 in. and put in +another set, being careful to get them all the same distance from the +bench, as the inner corners of the shelves rest on these braces. Now +pull out the nails and set the stand on its feet. + +Next put in the shelves. Place the inner corner of one on one of the +braces, and fasten it there with a screw put through the brace from the +bottom. Now fasten a clamp on each leg at the ends of the shelf in such +a manner as to form a support on the top side of the shelf. Then put +four screws through the shelf from the bottom into the legs. Repeat the +operation on each shelf, being careful to get them all the same height. +Four pieces like Fig. 3 should now be made. These pieces will have to be +fitted in place as they should slant outward so that it will be easy to +put articles through the holes. The holes should be about 5/8-in. +diameter. + +The top can be made by cutting off two pieces from the 10-in. board, +each 20 in. long, and fastening them together with dowels. Smooth the +ends and be sure that the boards match evenly. It makes a better job to +glue the top together, in addition to the dowels, and, if you do this, +it would be better to make the top first. Then it will have time to dry +before you are ready to use it. In putting on the top, care should be +taken to get each of the corners an equal distance from the legs. Then a +screw may be put up through each one of the braces and two or three +through each leg into the top. Now smooth all rough and uneven places +with fine sandpaper and apply the finish. Secure some metal matchsafes +and scratchers, fasten on as shown in the photograph, and the stand is +complete. + + + + +A CHINA CLOSET + + +This beautiful piece of mission furniture can be made by anyone who has +a few good tools and knows how to use them. The cost is very moderate +and if you are convenient to a mill a great amount of labor can be saved +by ordering the pieces ready cut to length, squared, and sanded. +Quarter-sawed oak should be used and the material needed will be as +follows: + + 4 posts, 2 by 2 by 54 in., S-4-S. + 2 top and bottom boards, 3/4 by 15-3/4 by 39-1/2 in., S-1-S. + 2 shelves, 3/4 by 15-1/2 by 38 in., S-2-S. + 2 lower end braces, 3/4 by 5 by 15 in., S-2-S. + 2 upper end braces, 3/4 by 4-1/4 by 15 in., S-2-S. + 1 lower front board, 3/4 by 3 by 40 in., S-1-S. + 1 upper front board, 3/4 by 2-1/4 by 40 in., S-1-S. + 4 door frames, 3/4 by 1-3/4 by 43-1/2 in., S-2-S. + 4 door frames, 3/4 by 2 by 19 in., S-2-S. + 4 upright end pieces, 3/4 by 1-1/2 by 39-1/2 in., S-2-S. + 5 back pieces, 1/2 by 8 by 46-1/2 in., S-1-S. + 2 cleats, 1 by 1 by 37-3/4 in., soft wood. + 4 cleats, 1 by 1 by 12-3/4 in., soft wood. + 4 blocks, 1/2 by 1 by 1-1/2 in. + +First be sure the posts are perfectly square and of equal length. Either +chamfer or round the upper ends as desired. The mortises can be laid out +and cut, or they can be left until the tenons are all made and then +marked and cut directly from each tenon. + +The top and bottom boards should have the corners cut to clear the posts +as shown in the drawing. The top board should be finished on both sides +and the bottom one on the upper side only and be sure to get the best +side up. + +[Illustration: Details of China Closet] + +Cut the tenons on the front boards back 1/4 in. from the face as shown +in the end view. The boards should be finished on the outside sides and +edges. The end pieces are fitted and finished in a similar manner except +that the inside edge is rabbeted for the glass as shown. The side +pieces are also rabbeted for the glass and the posts have grooves 1/2 +in. deep cut in them to hold these side pieces. They are glued in place +and this can be done after the frame is put together. + +[Illustration: China Closet Complete] + +The two shelves are finished on both sides and the front edges. The +doors are fitted in the usual manner by a tenon and mortise joint at the +ends. They are rabbeted on the inside for the glass and are finished on +all sides. + +Before gluing any of the parts together, see that they all fit and go +together perfectly square. The posts, side, and front pieces should be +glued and assembled, then the top and bottom boards put in place to hold +the frame square when the clamps are put on. Leave dry for about 24 +hours, then scrape all the surplus glue from about the joints as the +finish will not take when there is any glue. Fasten the top and bottom +boards to the frame by means of screws through cleats as shown in the +drawing. The backing is put on and finished on the front side. A mirror +can be put in the back without much trouble, if it is desired. The +shelves should be put in place and held at the back by screws through +the backing and at the front by two small blocks on the posts as shown. + +After the closet is all assembled it should be thoroughly gone over with +fine sandpaper before any finish is applied. It can be finished in any +one of the many mission stains which are supplied by the trade for this +purpose. + + + + +A LEATHER-COVERED FOOTSTOOL + + +The illustration shows a very handy footstool in mission style. The +following list of materials will be needed: + + 4 oak posts, 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 12 in., S-4-S. + 2 sides, 3/4 by 3 by 12 in., soft wood. + 2 ends, 3/4 by 3 by 8 in., soft wood. + 1 bottom, 3/4 by 8 by 12 in., soft wood. + 1 small box of 8 oz. tacks + 2-1/2 doz. ornamental head nails. + 1 piece of dark leather, 16 by 20 in. + 1/2 lb. hair and a small portion of mission stain. + +The posts are the only parts made of quarter-sawed oak, the other +parts, being covered with leather, can be made of any kind of soft wood. +Chamfer the top end of each post, and taper the lower ends as shown in +detail. When this is done the mortises can be cut for the sides as shown +in the post detail. When cutting the mortises and tenons take care to +make them fit perfectly, as there is nothing to brace the legs at the +bottom. The strength of the stool depends upon the joints. Make the +surface of the posts smooth by first using No. 1 sandpaper, then +finishing with No. 00. + +[Illustration: Footstool Leather Covered] + +The parts are now assembled. First clamp the ends together, using plenty +of glue on the joints, and drive some small nails on the inside of the +posts through the tenon ends. When the glue has set, the remaining sides +can be put together the same as the ends. Fit the bottom on the inside +about 1 in. from the top. This can be made fast by driving nails +through the sides and ends of the board. The finishing is done by +putting on the mission stain as the directions state on the can, then +wax the surface to get a dull gloss. + +[Illustration: Details of Footstool] + +The leather is now put on. Notch out the corners to fit around the +posts, but do not cut the ends off. Lap them under the cover. Before +nailing on the cover fix the hair evenly over the top, about 6 in. deep. +Draw the leather over the hair and fasten the edges with the 8-oz. +tacks. The ornamental nails are driven in last, as shown in the drawing, +to make a good appearance. + + + + +ARTS-CRAFTS MANTEL CLOCK + + +The clock shown in the illustration was designed especially for rooms +furnished in mission style. The clock, however, may be made of mahogany +or other wood to match the furniture in any room where it is to be +placed. If the mission effect is desired, an oxidized or copper sash +should be used. Movements can be bought at the salesroom of a clock +company. A movement should be selected that is wide enough from the +front to the back to allow the clock case to be made sufficiently deep +for standing without being easily upset. + +[Illustration: Mantel Clock with Wood and Copper Front] + +Quarter-sawed white oak is the best material for this clock, but any +other wood which works easily and takes a stain well may be used. Two +pieces, 3/8 in. thick, 6-1/2 in. wide, and 8-1/2 in. long, will be +needed for the front and back. One piece, 5 in. wide, 6 in. long, and +with a thickness sufficient for the clock movement, is needed for the +middle part. The thickness of this piece depends on the movement +secured. + +After the front and back pieces are finished, and a piece of hammered +copper screwed on the front as shown in the drawing, the middle piece +must be made just thick enough to make the whole distance from the front +of the copper to the back of the clock equal to the depth of the +movement. Plane one edge on both front and back pieces. Lay out the +design and the centers for the circular holes from this planed edge. +Use a plane and chisel to cut the outside design. The hole can be bored +out with an expansive bit, or sawed out with a scroll saw, and filed +perfectly round with a half-round wood file. The bit will give the best +results. If the bit is used, bore holes in a piece of scrap wood until +the exact size is found. + +[Illustration: Details of Mantel Clock] + +The outside design of the piece of copper is made to correspond to the +design of the clock. The circular hole in the copper can be cut with the +expansive bit by first punching a hole in the center to receive the spur +of the bit, placing on a block of wood and boring through a little way. +The spur on the cutter will cut out the copper. Fasten the copper to the +front with copper nails or round-headed screws. + +If good glue can be had, the three pieces of wood may be glued together. +If the glue cannot be relied upon, put in two flat-headed screws from +the back. + +The clock can be finished with a dark stain and waxed, or, as it is +small, it can be easily fumed. If stain is used, stain and wax the +pieces before putting them together. The fuming process is more easily +done after the clock is assembled. Secure a bucket, a peck measure, or +any receptacle large enough, when inverted, to put over the clock. Pour +about 2 oz. of strong ammonia into a saucer or small pan. Support the +clock above the saucer and cover both with the inverted bucket. Allow it +to stand for three or four days--the longer it stands the darker the +fumed finish will be. Finish with two coats of bleached wax. Do not use +ordinary uncolored wax, as it will show in the unfilled pores of the +wood. The works of the clock should not be in the frame while fuming. + + + + +A MUSIC STAND + + +The attractive and useful piece of mission furniture shown in the +accompanying illustration is made of quarter-sawed oak. Considerable +labor can be saved in its construction if the stock is ordered from the +mill ready cut to length, squared and sanded. The stock list consists of +the following pieces: + + 1 top, 3/4 by 16 by 20 in., S-2-S. + 1 shelf, 3/4 by 11-1/2 by 15 in., S-2-S. + 1 shelf, 3/4 by 12 by 15 in., S-2-S. + 1 shelf, 3/4 by 14-1/2 by 15 in., S-2-S. + 1 shelf, 3/4 by 16 by 15 in., S-1-S. + 4 legs, 3/4 by 5 by 41 in., S-2-S. + 2 lower crosspieces, 3/4 by 3 by 9 in., S-2-S. + 2 upper crosspieces, 3/4 by 2 by 9 in., S-2-S. + 4 end slats, 5/8 by 2 by 34 in., S-2-S. + 20 R.H. screws, 2 in. long. + +The four shelves and the top are so wide that it will be necessary to +make them from two or more pieces glued together. The top should have a +1/4-in. bevel cut around the upper edge as shown in the drawing. + +[Illustration: Details of Music Stand] + +[Illustration: Music Stand Complete] + +The curve of the legs can be cut with a bracket saw or a drawknife, +care being taken to get the edges square and smooth. The four +crosspieces are fastened to the legs by means of tenons and mortises. +The end slats are joined to the crosspieces in the same manner. The legs +can be assembled in pairs with the slats and crosspieces in place. They +can be glued in this position, and when dry they should be carefully +gone over with fine sandpaper to remove all rough spots. The shelves +can now be put in place. They should be fastened to the legs with +round-headed screws. The top is also fastened on with screws. When +applying the finish, remove the top board and the shelves and finish +them separately. The stand can be finished in any one of the many +mission stains supplied by the trade for this purpose. + +This handsome piece of furniture can be used as a magazine stand as well +as a music stand, if desired, and, if it is made and finished well, it +will prove an ornament to any home. + + + + +MAKING SCREWS HOLD IN THE END GRAIN OF WOOD + + +[Illustration: MAKING SCREWS HOLD IN END GRAIN] + +It is often necessary to fasten one piece of wood to the end of another +by means of screws. Wood being a fibrous material, it can be readily +understood that when a screw having sharp threads is put in the end +grain parallel to these fibers the threads cut them in such a way that, +when an extra strain is put upon the parts, the screw pulls out, +bringing with it the severed fibers. The accompanying sketch shows how +this difficulty may be overcome, and at the same time make the screw +hold firmly. A hole is bored and a dowel, preferably of hardwood, glued +in it, the grain at right angles to that of the piece. + +The size of the dowel, and its location, can be determined by the +diameter and the length of the screw. The dowel need not extend all the +way through the piece, but should be put in from the surface where the +grain of the dowel will be least objectionable. + +When putting screws in hard wood much labor will be saved by applying +soap to the threads. + + + + +A WALL CASE WITH A MIRROR DOOR + + +The wall case shown in the accompanying picture will serve well as a +medicine case. Having a paneled door in which is set a mirror, it serves +equally well as a shaving case. It is best made of some hard wood, +though a soft wood such as pine or yellow poplar will work up easier and +look well finished with three or four coats of white enamel paint. + +There will be needed the following pieces: + + 2 sides, 5/8 by 6 by 32-1/2 in., S-4-S. + 1 top and 1 bottom, 5/8 by 6 by 18 in., S-4-S. + 1 top of back, 1/2 by 4 by 16-1/4 in., S-2-S. + 1 bottom of back, 1/2 by 3 by 16-1/4 in., S-4-S. + 1 shelf, 5/8 by 5 by 16 in., S-4-S. + 1 back, 1/4 by 16 by 21 in., S-2-S. + +DOOR + + 2 stiles, 5/8 by 3 by 20-1/2 in., S-4-S. + 1 top rail, 5/8 by 2 by 11 in., S-4-S. + 1 bottom rail, 5/8 by 4 by 11 in., S-4-S. + 1 backing for door, 3/16 by 10 by 15 in., S-2-S. + +First shape the ends of the two side pieces as shown in the drawing. +Next square the top and bottom pieces of the case to size, and lay out +and cut the tenons on the ends. Lay out and cut the mortises in the +side pieces, also the groove for the shelf, having first squared the +shelf to size. Cut and shape the top and bottom pieces of the back as +shown. Cut the rebates in the side pieces into which these pieces are to +rest their ends. Cut the rebate for the back. Thoroughly scrape and +sandpaper these parts and assemble them. Cut and fit the back in place. + +[Illustration: Wall Case Details] + +The door is to be made next. Plan the different parts of the door so +that the edges may be planed to fit the opening; that is, make the door +a good quarter larger at top and bottom than the opening. In cutting the +rebate the easiest way is to use a rabbeting plane and cut the full +length of the pieces. By using a tenon on the rails in which one +shoulder is as much longer than the other as the rebate is deep there is +no resulting groove showing at the corner. + +[Illustration: Case with Mirror Door] + +The wood should be finished before the glass is set, at least, it should +be filled, if of hard wood, and one coat of paint put on, if of soft +wood which is to be enameled. + +In setting the glass, place a thin cushion of putty between the rebate +and the glass and another thin cushion between the glass and the fillet +of wood or the backing which is to protect the back of the glass. + +Fit the door, and then put on the hinges and lock. If desired, the +tenons may be made keyed as shown in the photograph instead of through +as shown in the drawing. + +To finish the case, if of oak, apply a coat of light paste filler, the +directions being on the filler can. Next put on a coat of white shellac. +When this has hardened apply two coats of some good varnish. Allow time +for each coat to harden and rub the first coats with haircloth or curled +hair, and the last with pulverized pumice and raw linseed oil or crude +oil. + +If the wood is soft and an enamel white is desired, the enamel is +applied not unlike paint. The directions will be found on the cans in +which the paint is purchased. + + + + +A SIDE CHAIR + + +A side chair of simple design and construction is here given. The great +difficulty with most chair designs is that the back is generally +designed narrower than the front, thus necessitating the rails entering +the posts or legs at angles. To the amateur this is quite confusing. The +chair illustrated is the same in width, both back and front, so that the +shoulders of all the rails are at right angles to the sides. The back of +the chair is straight, thus simplifying the design still more. + +[Illustration: Side Chair Complete] + +Another thing which is confusing to the beginner in his efforts to lay +out the mortises is the irregular placing of the rails. It will be noted +that in this design the rails of side, front and back are on the same +level. + +Plain sawed red oak will be appropriate for this piece. Have the pieces +mill-planed and sandpapered on four sides to size, allowing 1/2 in. +extra to the lengths for squaring up the ends. + +[Illustration: Details of Side Chair] + +There will be needed the following: + + 4 rails, 7/8 by 2 by 17-1/2 in. + 4 rails, 3/4 by 2 by 17-1/2 in. + 2 front posts, 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 19 in. + 2 rear posts, 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 37-1/2 in. + 1 back, 3/4 by 9-3/4 by 17-1/2 in. + 2 cleats, 3/8 by 1 by 16 in. + 4 slats, 3/8 by 2 by 16-1/2 in. + +Begin work by cutting the posts to the lengths indicated in the drawing. +The lower ends should be chamfered slightly to prevent their splintering +from usage. The top ends are cut to an angle of 45 deg., the slope +beginning 1/2 in. below the top. Lay out and cut the mortises. To do +this, lay off the measurements on one of the posts, then place all four +side by side on the bench, with the face marks up. Even the ends with +the try-square and then carry the measurements just made across all of +them, using the try-square. The rails ought to be shouldered on all four +sides. Three-eighths inch is a good thickness for the tenons. The width +may be 1-1/4 in. and the length 1 in. + +Place the rails side by side on the bench with the joint-edges up and +the ends evened. Measure off the desired length on one of them and carry +the lines across all of them to indicate the location of the shoulder +lines. Separate the pieces and square these lines entirely around all of +the sides of each piece. With the tenon saw rip and cross cut to these +lines. + +The back, it will be noted, is set on a slant to add comfort. Thoroughly +clean all the parts and assemble them, using good hot glue. Put the back +together first, then the front. After these have dried, put the side +rails in place. + +Cut and fit the two cleats--one to the front rail and one to the rear +rail. Keep them even with the lower edge of the rail so as to form a +slight recess at the top when the slats are in place. This is to keep +the cushion from sliding off. The slats need not be "let into" the +cleats but merely fastened to their top edges. The cushion may be made +of Spanish roan skin and should be filled with elastic felt. + +In the chair shown, the joints are reinforced by the addition of lag +screws. If the glue is good and the joints well fitted, these are not +necessary. + + + + +AN ARM CHAIR + + +The arm chair here described and illustrated is intended to be one of +the set of diners made after the design of the side chair described on +another page. The same general directions for making the side chair +apply equally to the arm chair. + +The stock given in the following list should be purchased surfaced on +four sides and well sandpapered: + + 2 rear posts, 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 38 in. + 2 front posts, 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 26-1/2 in. + 9 rails, 7/8 by 2 by 19-1/2 in. + 1 rail, 7/8 by 1-1/2 by 19-1/2 in. + 3 slats, 1/2 by 2 by 12-1/2 in. + 2 arms, 7/8 by 4-1/2 by 20-1/2 in. + 2 brackets, 7/8 by 2-1/4 by 2-1/2 in. + 2 cleats, 3/8 by 1 by 19 in. + 4 slats, 3/8 by 2 by 19 in. + +Prepare the posts first by cutting them to the lengths shown in the +drawing. In the photograph the front posts have their tops cut off +square and the arms fastened to them by means of lag screws. A better +way from a mechanical point of view would be to shoulder the top ends on +the four sides, cut through-mortises in the arms and insert these +tenoned posts into these mortises, pinning the arm to the post by means +of small dowels in the edge of the post and through the tenon. + +The brackets under the arms are to be fastened to the posts and arms by +means of concealed dowels and glue of good quality. + +All of the rails should be tenoned into the posts thoroughly, even if +the lag screw fastenings are used. If the lag screws are used, the +tenons may be what are known as stubb tenons--tenons of short length. +Good hot glue should be used in either case. + +The shape of the arms is indicated in the drawing. They are fastened to +the rear posts by means of dowels and glue. + +[Illustration: Arm Chair Complete] + +The slats, or verticals, of the back should not have their ends tenoned +but should have the mortises in the rails cut sufficiently large to "let +in" the whole end of each. This is much easier and more likely to result +in a satisfactory fit than to shoulder them. Any unevenness in the +lengths of the respective slats will not affect the fitting of the +joints by this latter method. + +The tops of the rear posts in this chair, as in the side chair, are cut +to angles of 45 deg., beginning the slope at lines marked 1/2 in. from +the tops. + +[Illustration: Details of Chair] + +The bottom is made up of 2-in. slats fitted between the front and back +rails and fastened to cleats which have been previously fastened to the +insides of the front and back rails. Keep these cleats low enough on the +rails so that the top surfaces of the slats shall rest somewhat below +the top edges of the rails. Cushions, such as the one shown, can be +purchased ready made or they can be easily made by the amateur. + +A good finish for this chair and its mates is obtained as follows: Apply +one coat of brown Flemish water stain. This stain in the original +package is very dark in tone and unless an almost black finish is +wanted, it should be lightened by the addition of one-half or two-thirds +water. Apply with a brush or sponge and allow to dry over night. When +dry, sandpaper lightly with fine or worn sandpaper to remove the raised +grain caused by the water of the stain. Put on a very thin coat of +shellac. This is to prevent the "high lights" in close-grained woods +from being discolored by the stain in the filler which is to follow. The +shellac being very thin does not fill the pores of the wood perceptibly. +Next, sand the shellac coat lightly when it has hardened. Apply a coat +of paste filler colored considerably darker than the stain to the tone +desired for the open grain. If the filler is well stirred and properly +applied, one coat ought to be sufficient. If it does not fill the pores +satisfactorily, apply another coat when the first has had time to +harden. Vandyke brown is used to color the filler, if none but natural +color is to be had. On the hardened filler apply a thin coat of shellac. +On this apply several coats of wax. The directions for waxing will be +found upon the cans in which the wax comes. + + + + +A BOOKCASE + + +This beautiful piece of mission furniture can be made at a very moderate +cost by anyone who has a slight knowledge of tools. Considerable labor +can be saved by ordering the material from the mill ready cut to size, +dressed and sanded. Quarter-sawed oak is the best wood to use and it is +comparatively easy to obtain. Plain-sawed oak looks well, but is more +liable to warp than the quarter-sawed and this is quite an element in +pieces as wide as the ones used. For the complete bookcase the following +material will be needed: + + 1 top, 3/4 by 15 by 31-1/4 in., hard wood, S-1-S. + 1 top back board, 3/4 by 4 by 30-1/4 in., hard wood, S-1-S. + 2 sides, 3/4 by 14 by 50 in., hard wood, S-1-S. + 1 bottom, 3/4 by 14 by 28-3/4 in., hard wood, S-1-S. + 1 bottom rail, 3/4 by 4 by 28-3/4 in., hard wood, S-1-S. + 1 center piece, 3/4 by 2 by 45-3/4 in., hard wood, S-2-S. + 4 door sides, 3/4 by 1-1/2 by 45-1/4 in., hard wood, S-2-S. + 4 door ends, 3/4 by 1-1/2 by 14 in., hard wood, S-2-S. + 4 pieces door lattice, 1/2 by 1/2 by 12-1/2 in., hard wood. + 4 pieces door lattice, 1/2 by 1/2 by 7 in., hard wood. + 2 bottom cleats, 1-1/4 by 1-1/4 by 13 in., soft wood. + 2 top cleats, 1 by 1 by 12-1/2 in., soft wood. + 3 shelves, 1/2 by 12 by 28-1/2 in., soft wood. + 12 pieces backing, 3/8 by 4 by 29-3/4 in., soft wood. + 4 hinges. + 2 door handles. + +Begin with the sides by cutting them so they will pair up all right. The +front edges are rounded while the back edges are rabbeted on the inside +as deep as the backing to be used. The bottoms are cut as shown in the +sketch. Holes about 1/2 in. deep should be bored on the inside at the +proper places for the wooden pegs which hold up the shelves. + +[Illustration: Completed Bookcase.] + +[Illustration: Details of Bookcase] + +The top and bottom boards should have the front edges rounded and sanded +the same as the sides. The top board is sanded on one side only and +care should be taken to get the best side up. + +Now cut and fit the top back board. This is fastened to the top by means +of screws. Screw two cleats to each of the sides as shown and by running +screws through these into the top and bottom boards the frame is +completed. + +The backing which can be made of some cheap lumber is now put on. Next +put in the center upright piece between the doors by means of a tenon +and mortise at the top and nail at the bottom. The front edge should be +rounded and the edge and sides sanded. Cut and fit the bottom rail as +shown. It is fastened to the frame by means of cleats on the back side. + +The doors are put together by means of a tenon and mortise. They should +be rabbeted for the lattice work and the glass. This lattice work can be +omitted and leaded glass put in its place which is very becoming to this +kind of work. + +When the case is completed it must be carefully gone over with sandpaper +before any finish is applied. + +A mission stain is suitable for work of this kind, but it can also be +finished in "golden oak" which is done in the following manner: First +put on a golden oak stain and after it has dried for about 2 hours, +apply the filler. Let this dry about 10 minutes then rub off with an old +rag. Then go over the case again with some very fine sandpaper and after +seeing that all parts are free from dust and dirt the varnish can be +applied. Three coats of varnish will give a beautiful glossy finish. + + + + +A LAMP STAND + + +A mission table lamp stand for those who use electric lights is shown in +the accompanying illustration. It is suitable for either the office or +the home and is very simple in design and construction. The stock should +be quarter-sawed oak and it can be ordered from the mill ready cut to +length, squared and sanded. The following pieces will be needed: + + 1 post, 1-1/2 in. sq. by 23 in. + 1 arm, 1-/8 by 3/4 by 13-1/2 in. + 1 block, 3/4 in. thick by 6 in. square. + 1 block, 1 in. thick by 9 in. square. + +[Illustration: Details of Lamp Stand] + +Square up the base blocks and fasten them together with screws as shown +in the detail sketch. A mortise, 1 in. square, is cut in the center of +the blocks for the center post.. Lead weights, covered with felt, +should be attached to the bottom, as shown. The post has a tenon cut on +one end to fit the base, and a mortise cut in the other for the arm. +Holes are bored in the arm from the ends for the wires. They can be +plugged after the wires are in place. A hole is also bored in the top of +the center post to connect with the holes in the arm for the lead wire. + +[Illustration: Electric Lamp Stand Complete] + +It is best to glue the joints together, although this is not necessary +if the joints are a tight fit. Sandpaper the parts thoroughly, then +stain to match the other furniture. + +[Illustration: Extension Dining Table Complete] + + + + +AN EXTENSION DINING TABLE + + +The accompanying sketch and photograph show a simple design of an +extension dining table of the mission style. It is very easy to +construct and can be built at home by anyone who is at all handy with +tools. It should be made of quarter-sawed oak, which can be secured at +the mill ready cut to length, squared and sanded. Order the following +pieces: + + 2 top pieces, 1 by 23 by 46 in. + 2 extra leaves, 1 by 12 by 46 in. + 2 rails, 3/4 by 3 by 44 in. + 4 rails, 3/4 by 3 by 22 in. + 2 pieces for posts, 3/4 by 8 by 24 in. + 2 pieces for posts, 3/4 by 6 by 24 in. + 4 pieces for feet, 3 by 3 by 14 in. + 4 pieces for feet, 3 by 3 by 5 in. + 4 pieces for feet, 1 by 4 by 4 in. + 4 pieces moulding, 1 by 1 by 10 in. + 1 piece, 1 by 12 by 27 in., birchwood. + 2 brackets, 3/4 by 3 by 32 in., birchwood. + 2 pieces for slide, 1-3/4 by 3 by 36 in., birchwood. + 4 pieces for slide, 1 by 3 by 36 in., birchwood. + 12 pieces for slide, 3/4 by 1-1/2 by 36 in., birchwood. + +The feet can be made first by squaring up one end of each and beveling +the other as shown in the drawing. The short pieces are fastened to the +long ones by means of long screws and glue. The four square pieces +should be nailed to the outer ends and holes bored in them for the +casters. Prepare the pieces for the posts, and before nailing them +together fasten the feet to them with long screws. Be careful to get +them on square, else the table will not set level when complete. Now +nail and glue the pieces forming the table together and fasten the +moulding at the bottom. This moulding should have mitered corners as +shown in the bottom view. Also fasten the rest piece to the top of the +post, using long screws and glue. + +[Illustration: Details of Dining Table] + +The slides can be made next. The pieces are made and fastened together +with screws as shown in the enlarged detail view. This slide, if made +with care, is a good one. The center piece should be firmly fastened to +the post rest with long screws. The screws that fasten into the top +should be inserted from below through counter-bored holes as shown. + +Miter the rails at the corners and glue them to the top. Blocks can be +used on the inside if desired, which will make a much stronger +construction. Screw the two brackets to the top as shown. These help to +support the table when it is extended. + +When complete the table should be carefully gone over with fine +sandpaper, and all glue and rough spots removed. Apply stain of the +desired color. This can be any one of the many mission stains supplied +by the trade for this purpose. + + + + +AN OAK-BOUND CEDAR CHEST + + +This cedar chest for storing unused bedding or furs is not a difficult +thing to make and when made, the hard oak binding takes the wear and +protects the softer cedar so that the chest ought to serve several +generations. Order the stock as follows: + +CEDAR + + 2 top and bottom pieces, 7/8 by 16-1/2 by 34-1/2 in., S-2-S. + 2 sides, 7/8 by 18-7/8 by 34-1/2 in., S-2-S. + 2 ends, 7/8 by 18-7/8 by 14-3/4 in., S-2-S. + +OAK + + 2 overhanging top pieces, 1 by 1 by 36-1/2 in., S-4-S. + 2 overhanging top pieces, 1 by 1 by 18-1/2 in., S-4-S. + 2 lock and hinge rails, 1 by 2-1/2 by 36-1/2 in., S-2-S. + 2 lock and hinge rails, 1 by 2-1/2 by 18-1/2 in., S-2-S. + 2 base pieces, 1 by 3-1/4 by 36-1/2 in., S-2-S. + 2 base pieces, 1 by 3-1/4 by 18-1/2 in., S-2-S. + +[Illustration: Details of Cedar Chest] + +Specify thoroughly seasoned Tennessee red cedar and plain sawed white +oak and have the different pieces mill-planed and sandpapered as +indicated in the stock-bill. This bill allows 1/2 in. extra on the +length and the width of each piece for "squaring up" of all pieces +except those marked to be surfaced on four sides. + +Begin by squaring the sides and ends to size. Probably the best joint +for the corners is the dovetail. If the worker is not experienced in +woodworking, some of the more simple joints will do. It will be noted +that the drawing and stock-bill call for the simplest form of joint, +that in which the sides of the chest lap over the end. For the dovetail +joint it will be necessary to add 2 in. more to the length of the end +pieces, making them 16-3/4 in. each in the rough. + +Having got the sides and ends ready, fasten them together. The +perspective shows the sides fastened to the ends with ornamental headed +nails. Common nails are first used, being equally spaced, and the +ornamental heads are afterwards placed so as to cover their heads. + +Next square the bottom and nail it to the parts just assembled. Square +the top to the same size. + +The base stuff is squared on one edge only. The second edge--the upper +one--is to be beveled or sloped 1/8 in. to facilitate dusting and for +appearance sake. Fit these base pieces to place, mitering the joints. +Before fastening the parts to the chest proper, gauge a line 3/4 in. +from the lower edge and to a point 4-1/2 in. from each end, cut out to +this line and shape the base as shown in the drawing. Use finishing +nails for fastening the base to the chest. The heads should be "set" so +they may be covered later with a putty colored to match the finish. + +In a similar manner plane up, cut and fit the back and hinge rails. +These rails should be kept a "scant" 1/8 in. below the top edges of the +chest proper. The overhang of the lid fits down over in such a way as to +form a dust-proof joint between lid and chest proper. + +The overhang of the lid of 1 in. by 1-in. stock may next be mitered, +fitted and nailed to the lid. Thoroughly sandpaper all parts not so +treated and finish as follows: Put on all the oak pieces, two coats of +natural paste filler. This is best done before they are fastened in +place. Directions will be found on the cans in which the filler is kept. + +The red of the cedar may be heightened by applying a mahogany stain made +of Bismark brown aniline and boiling water, in the proportion of 3 qt. +of water to 1 oz. of aniline. If applied hot the stain will enter the +wood better. When dry, sandpaper lightly with No. 00 paper, both this +and the oak-filled pieces. + +Fasten the oak pieces in place and give the whole exterior a very thin +coat of shellac. After this has hardened, apply two coats of wax. Wax +comes in paste form and is to be applied with a cloth very sparingly. +Allow it to stand five or ten minutes then rub briskly with a soft dry +cloth to polish. The first coat is allowed to stand 24 hours before the +second is applied in a similar manner. + +Another finish, known as an egg-shell gloss shellac finish, is obtained +by omitting the wax and instead applying from two to five more coats of +shellac. Allow each coat 24 hours in which to harden, and rub each +hardened coat to a smooth finish, using curled hair, or fine steel +wool, or fine oiled sandpaper, before applying the next. + +[Illustration: Cedar Chest Complete] + +The metal reinforcements for the corners can be bought at a hardware +store, as can the lock, hinges, and handles. These parts are applied in +the usual manner--butt hinges being used. + +If well made, the chest is practically airtight. The interior is all of +red cedar, while the effect of the exterior in combining the light oak +and the red cedar is striking. + + + + +A TOOL FOR MAKING MORTISES + + +In the construction of mission furniture where mortise joints are mostly +used, those who cannot have access to a mortising machine will find the +following method of great assistance in obtaining a true mortise, which +is necessary in work of this kind. + +[Illustration: Boring Holes for Tenons] + +Take a block of wood, A, the exact thickness of the piece B to be +mortised, and with an auger bore a hole, the same size as the width of +the mortise to be made, exactly parallel to the sides of the block. This +can best be done on a drill press or a wood boring machine. If no +machine is available, great care should be taken in boring by hand, to +get the hole as nearly true as possible. Then nail a cleat, C, on the +side of the block, A, and let it extend down on piece B. Use a clamp to +hold the block in place while boring out the mortise. By changing the +position of the block and boring a number of holes, any length of +mortise can be made. The holes should afterwards be squared up with a +chisel. + + + + +A DRESSER FOR CHILD'S PLAYROOM + + +This dresser can be made of two kinds of wood as marked on the drawing +or it can be made all of one kind. The original dresser was made of oak +and walnut and was finished natural, the contrast between the light and +dark woods adding much to the value of the piece in the eyes of the +little ones. Have all surfaces that will show well sandpapered at the +mill. The following is a list of the material wanted: + + 4 oak posts, 1-1/2 in. square by 19-1/2 in., S-4-S. + 3 walnut drawer fronts, 3/4 by 5 by 17 in., S-2-S. + 6 yellow poplar drawer sides, 3/8 by 5 by 12 in., S-2-S. + 3 yellow poplar backs, 3/8 by 4-1/2 by 16-1/2 in., S-2-S. + 3 yellow poplar bottoms, 3/8 by 12 by 16-1/2 in., S-2-S. + 4 oak front stretchers, 7/8 by 1-3/4 by 17-1/2 in., S-4-S. + 4 oak side rails, 7/8 by 2 by 12 in., S-4-S. + 2 walnut side panels, 1/4 by 11 by 14-1/2 in., S-2-S. + 8 oak drawer slides, 7/8 by 2 by 10-1/2 in., S-2-S. + 6 oak drawer guides, 1/2 by 3/4 by 10-1/2 in., S-2-S. + 4 oak back stretchers, 7/8 by 2 by 17-1/2 in., S-2-S. + 1 oak top, 5/8 by 14 by 20-1/2 in., S-2-S. + 3 sq. ft. of 3/8 in. matched yellow pine ceiling for back. + +MIRROR SUPPORT + + 1 walnut piece, 7/8 by 1-3/4 by 20-1/2 in., S-2-S. + 1 walnut piece, 7/8 by 1-1/2 by 18 in., S-2-S. + 1 oak piece, 3/4 by 1-1/4 by 10-1/2 in., S-2-S. + 2 oak pieces, 7/8 by 1-1/2 by 11 in., S-2-S. + 1 walnut bracket piece, 7/8 by 1-1/4 by 5 in., S-2-S. + +MIRROR FRAME PARTS + + 2 walnut pieces, 7/8 by 1-1/2 by 12-1/2 in., S-2-S. + 2 walnut pieces, 7/8 by 1-1/2 by 10-1/2 in., S-2-S. + 2 oak pieces, 1/4 by 3/8 by 10 in., S-4-S. + 2 oak pieces, 1/4 by 3/8 by 8 in., S-4-S. + 1 back, 3/16 by 8 by 10 in., soft wood. + 2 cleats, 3/8 by 1-1/4 by 8 in. + 1 plain mirror glass, 7-1/2 by 9-1/2 in. + +[Illustration: Details of Dresser] + +Begin by planing the four posts to length. The lower ends should be +slightly beveled to prevent their slivering. Cut the mortises for the +tenons that are on the ends of the side rails. These rails are to be 7/8 +by 2 in. and the tenons should be 3/8 by 1-1/4 in. wide by 3/4 in. long. +The posts should be rabbeted down to their middles to a depth of 3/8 +in. so as to receive the 1/4-in. end panels. The end rails should be cut +to length and their tenons worked after one edge of each has been +rabbeted as were the posts. + +[Illustration: Dresser Complete] + +Having squared the panels to size, put the two ends of the dresser +together with glue. Next make the four frames which are to carry the +drawers. They should measure from outside to outside, in length 17-1/2 +in.; in width, 12-1/2 in. It is intended that the short pieces shall be +tenoned into the long ones. When these frames are ready, cut out each +corner as indicated in the cross section drawing. Reduce to size the +drawer guides and fasten them in place. Dowel the frames to the ends of +the dresser in the places indicated on the drawing. Put on the back, +nailing into frames to the ends of the dresser in the places indicated +and fasten the top in place, putting screws into it from the under side. + +The mirror frame and support should next be made. The drawing shows +quite clearly the parts and their relation to each other. All the slopes +are of 45 deg. Instead of rabbeting the mirror frame, a 1/4 by 3/8-in. +fillet of oak is nailed around to form the recess, the walnut frame and +oak fillet making a pretty contrast. All nail holes are to be filled +with putty colored to match the finish. Wooden pins or round-head screws +are to be used to fasten the mirror frame to its support and should be +placed above center an inch or so. + +The drawers are to be constructed in the usual manner. It is a good plan +to make the grooves 1/16 in. narrower than the stock is thick to insure +a fit, chamfering the under or back sides of the bottom and back if +necessary. Make the sides of the drawers of such a length that when the +drawer has been pushed in as far as it will go, the front will be +recessed about 1/4 in. behind the front crosspieces. Groove the inside +of the drawer front 3/16 in. to receive the bottom. The mirror should +not be placed until the wood has been finished. + +[Illustration: DRAWER CONSTRUCTION] + +Finish the wood natural, apply three coats of varnish. Rub the first two +with haircloth or curled hair and the last with pulverized pumice stone +and crude oil or raw linseed oil. This gives an egg-shell gloss. For a +dull finish, rub the varnish after it has become bone dry with +pulverized pumice stone and water, using a piece of rubbing felt. Rub +until the surface is smooth and even, and clean with a wet sponge or +chamois skin. If a polished finish is desired, rub first with pulverized +pumice stone and water, then with rotten stone and water. Finish with a +mixture of oil and a little pulverized rotten stone. + + + + +CUTTING TENONS WITH A HAND-SAW + + +This home-made tool will be a great help in the construction of mission +furniture. With its use, tenons may be entirely cut with a saw, +discarding the use of a chisel and mallet. The device consists of a +convenient length of straight board, A, Fig. 1, wide enough to cover the +widest piece to be tenoned. A piece of board, B, is fastened to A with +brads or small screws. This board should have a thickness equal to the +piece to be cut from the side of the tenon. The piece C is fastened to A +and B with small cleats at their upper ends. The space between B and C +should be wide enough for the blade of a saw to run through easily, and +also long enough to take in the widest part of the saw blade. The tool +and piece to be tenoned are placed in a vise as shown in Fig. 2. The +width of the piece removed for the tenon may be varied by putting in +pieces of cardboard between the work, E, and the piece A, Fig. 1. + +[Illustration: Sawing Tenons] + + + + +ARTS AND CRAFTS OIL LAMP + + +Electricity and gas are not always accessible in suburban or country +homes and the regular type of a mission lamp would be of little use. The +illustration shows an ordinary round wick kerosene lamp fitted out in +mission style. + +[Illustration: Artistic Mission Style Oil Lamp] + +[Illustration: Bronze Shade Holder] + +A few modifications were made in the design of an expensive lamp to +simplify the construction. The lamp should have a tall chimney. The +dimensions given in the drawings, and the photograph, will explain +themselves. Many of the details can be worked up by the maker. + +The body of the lamp is made of 1/2-in. oak and is provided with +openings as shown. The interior receptacle is very handy for holding a +match box, smoking articles, etc. + +A piece of copper band, 1 in. wide, is fastened to the body with large +upholsterers' tacks, to give it a finished appearance. The base is 7/8 +in. thick and in order to prevent tilting is provided with four square +feet, 1/4 in. thick. The top piece of the body is 1/2-in. oak, which is +provided with a hole large enough to receive the bowl of the lamp. If +such a lamp is not at hand, one can be purchased at a very reasonable +price. + +The shade is made of oak frames set in with clouded art glass panels. +The different sections of the frames are fastened together with brass +screws and the glass is held in place by triangular cleats of oak. Be +sure and fit the shade with cardboard panels before ordering the glass. +The cardboard can be used as a pattern in cutting the glass, and the +glass will then fit without recutting, which is quite difficult. + +The glass beaded fringe should be of suitable color to harmonize with +the finished lamp. + +The shade is supported by four brackets cast in bronze from a wood +pattern (dimensions given) and finished by filing, buffing and +lacquering. + + + + +ANOTHER CHINA CLOSET + + +The china closet shown in the accompanying illustration is well +proportioned and of pleasing appearance. It can be made of any one of +the several furniture woods in common use, but quarter-sawed oak will be +found to give the most pleasing effect. The stock should be ordered from +the mill ready sawed to length, squared and sanded. In this way much +hard labor will be saved. The following pieces will be needed: + + 1 top, 1 by 19 by 38 in., S-1-S. + 4 posts, 3/4 by 3 by 59 in., S-2-S. + 4 side rails, 3/4 by 3 by 31 in., S-1-S. + 4 end uprights, 1 by 2 by 48-1/2 in., S-2-S. + 4 end rails, 1 by 3 by 16 in., S-2-S. + 2 lattice rails, 1 by 2 by 13 in., S-2-S. + 1 top board, 3/4 by 3 by 36 in., S-1-S. + 4 side door rails, 3/4 by 2 by 47 in., S-2-S. + 6 cross rails, 3/4 by 2 by 12 in., S-2-S. + 4 slats, 1/2 by 3/4 by 16-1/2 in., S-2-S. + 4 slats, 1/2 by 3/4 by 13-1/2 in., S-2-S. + 8 slats, 1/2 by 3/4 by 12-1/2 in., S-2-S. + 4 shelves, 5/8 by 16 by 32 in., S-1-S., poplar. + 4 cleats, 1 in. sq. by 55 in., soft wood. + 4 cleats, 1 in. sq. by 28 in., soft wood. + 4 cleats, 1 in. sq. by 14 in., soft wood. + +[Illustration: China Closet with Latticework Doors and Sides] + +[Illustration: Details of China Closet] + +Having this material on hand, start with the four posts, as they are all +alike. Clamp them together, being careful to have them of the right +length, and the ends square. Trim the bottom, as shown in the detail +drawing, and then lay out the mortises for the front and back rails. +These rails can now be laid out and the tenons cut to fit the mortises +in the posts. The back rails should, in addition, be rabbeted for the +back board as shown. The end rails are fastened to the posts by means of +screws through 1-in. square cleats, fastened on the inside of the posts +as shown in the section A-A. In all cases the screws should be run +through the cleats into the framing so the heads will not show. The end +rails should be rabbeted on the inside for the latticework and the +glass. + +The back board should have the corners rounded as shown and be fastened +to the top board with screws through from the bottom side. The top board +is then fastened to the top rail cleats in the same manner. + +The doors are put together by means of tenons and mortises. The frames +should be rabbeted on the inside for the latticework and the glass. +Leaded glass can be used in place of this latticework, if it is desired. +Suitable hinges and a catch should be supplied. These can be purchased +at any hardware store. + +The shelves should be cut out at the corners to fit around the cleats. +They rest on small blocks which are fastened to the cleats, or if +desired, small holes can be drilled and pins used instead. + +The back is put on in the usual manner. A mirror can be put in without +much trouble if it is desired. + +When putting the frame together, glue should be used on the joints, as +it makes them much stiffer. Be careful to get the frame together +perfectly square, or it will be hard to fit the doors and the glass. +When it is complete, go over the whole carefully with fine sandpaper and +remove all rough spots. Scrape all the surplus glue from about the +joints, as stain will not take when there is any glue. The closet can be +finished in any one of the many mission stains supplied by the trade for +this purpose. + +[Illustration: Oak Bedstead Complete] + + + + +AN OAK BEDSTEAD + + +The accompanying sketches show an artistic design for a mission bed, so +simple in construction and design that most any one that has a few tools +and a knowledge of their use can make it. It is best made of +quarter-sawed oak, as this wood is the easiest to procure and work up +and looks well with any finish. If the stock is ordered from the mill +ready cut to length, squared and sanded, much of the hard labor will be +saved. + +The following is a list of the material needed: + + 2 posts, 2-1/2 by 2-1/2 by 50 in. + 2 posts, 2-1/2 by 2-1/2 by 44 in. + 2 end rails, 1 by 6 by 56 in. + 2 side rails, 1 by 6 by 78 in. + 5 end rails, 1 by 4 by 56 in. + 3 end rails, 1 by 2 by 56 in. + 8 vertical slats, 3/8 by 6 by 11-1/2 in. + 10 vertical slats, 3/8 by 2 by 11-1/2 in. + 2 cleats, 1 by 1 by 78 in. + 5 slats, 3/4 by 3 by 55-1/2 in. + 20 blocks, 1 by 1 by 3 in. + +Square up the four posts in pairs and lay out the mortises as per +drawing. To do this, lay them side by side on a flat surface with the +ends square and mark them with a try-square. The tenons on the end rails +are laid out in the same manner as the posts. Four of the end rails +should be marked and mortises cut for the upright slats as shown in the +detail drawing. The tenons on the end rails are about 1 in. long, while +those on the slats can be 3/4 in. long. Fit all the parts together +before gluing to see that they fit square and tight. After the glue has +been applied clamp them together perfectly square and set them away to +dry. They should dry at least twenty-four hours before the clamps are +removed. + +[Illustration: Details of Oak Bedstead] + +While the ends are drying, the side rails can be made. These have a +1-in. square cleat screwed to the inner side for the slats to rest upon. +If springs are used, five slats will be sufficient. They can be placed +where the springs will rest upon them. After the position of the slats +has been located, nail small blocks at their sides to hold them in +place. For fastening the side rails to the posts, patent devices can be +purchased at a local hardware store. The posts will have to be mortised +to receive these, and care should be exercised to get them in the right +place. + +When the bed is complete go over it carefully and scrape all the surplus +glue from about the joints, as the finish will not take where there is +any glue. Remove all rough spots with fine sandpaper; then apply the +stain you like best, which may be any of the many mission stains +supplied by the trade for this purpose. If this bed is well made and +finished, it will be an ornament to any home. + + + + +AN OAK FOOTSTOOL + + +The footstool shown in the illustration can be made from any kind of +wood, but when it is intended to be finished in mission style, +quarter-sawed oak will produce the best effect. The material needed will +be as follows: + + 1 top, 1 by 9-1/2 by 12 in., S-1-S. + 2 legs, 3/4 by 8 by 12 in., S-2-S. + 1 brace, 3/4 by 7 by 9 in., S-1-S. + +Order these pieces cut to length, squared and sanded. A full-sized +layout of the front view should be made to get the correct bevels for +the legs and brace. The design of the legs can be varied to suit the +fancy of the maker. For such a design as shown draw one-half of it on +paper; fold on the center line and with scissors cut both sides of the +outline by following the lines drawn. Trace around this pattern on the +wood, and saw out with a compass or keyhole saw. The sawed edges should +be smoothed and sandpapered. + +[Illustration: Details of Footstool] + +The perforation in the top board is made by first boring holes, then +trimming out the edges with a sharp chisel. Be sure to get the best side +of the board up. + +[Illustration: Footstool Complete] + +The legs are fastened to the top and to the braces with 1-3/4-in. wood +screws as shown in the detail drawing. After the stool is assembled, go +over it carefully with fine sandpaper and remove all rough spots before +applying the finish. This finish can be any one of the many different +kinds supplied by the trade for this purpose. If this stool is well made +and finished, it will be a useful and attractive article. + +[Illustration: Table and Seat Decorated in Pyro-Carving] + + + + +A LIBRARY SET IN PYRO-CARVING + + +The multitude of indifferently executed small articles which followed +the introduction of pyrography is beginning to disappear, people are +considering the art more seriously and applying it to more dignified +uses. Pyro-carving is one of the new methods of decorating furniture +which is both beautiful and practical, two qualities which do not always +go together. + +The library set illustrated consists of a table, 30 by 50 in., with two +benches, 14 in. wide of the same length. The supports are made of +selected white pine, which must be absolutely free from pitch. The pine +is soft enough to work easily with the point and stands wear much better +than basswood. The tops and braces are made of curly fir, all of the +material must be 2-in. lumber, which dresses to about an inch and a +half. All surfaces, except the faces of the supports, are given a +well-rubbed coat of oil with a little burnt umber, the stain to be +applied directly to the wood without a filler. + +On the outside of the supports the design is drawn in with pencil, the +background is then cut out smoothly with a chisel to the depth of an +eighth of an inch, leaving the decoration in relief. It is then burned +deeply, the background in straight flat strokes, the outlines having the +effect of a sloping, dark edge. The shadows are burned in as deeply as +possible and the shading is put in with the flat of the point. + +A wax or egg-shell oil varnish finish is most suitable for this set. + +[Illustration: Grille for an Arch] + + + + +A GRILLE WITH PEDESTALS TO MATCH + + +The accompanying sketch shows something unique in a grille that adds to +the appearance of a home furnished in mission style. When it is stained +and finished to match the furniture, it gives a consummate tone that +would be difficult to obtain by any other means. + +To get the best results it should be made to blend with the furniture +and the arch in which it is to fit, in both weight and style. This will +depend very much upon one's preference, and for this reason full +dimensions are not given. No difficulty will be experienced, however, by +anyone handy with tools, in making it. + +The material should be quarter-sawed oak, which can be secured planed +and sanded at the mill. For the grille order 1 by 1-1/2-in. and 1/2 by +1-1/2-in. stock. The method of making the bars is shown in the detailed +sketch. The two end bars should be made of solid pieces, 3/4 by 1-1/2 +in., with two rectangular slots mortised in each to receive the +supports. The supports should be just the right length to go in the +arch. To erect, slip the end bars on the supports, hold the grille in +place and fasten the bars to the sides of the arch with screws. + +The size of the pedestals and the connecting pieces will depend upon the +size of the arch. These connecting pieces should be well mortised into +the post, and if you own your own home and intend the pedestals to +become a fixture, they should also be mortised into the sides of the +arch. If not, they may be fastened to the arch with blind screws. The +amount of material required will depend upon the size of the arch. + + + + +A LADY'S WRITING DESK + + +This desk of mission style is a little more complicated than some of the +other pieces of mission furniture that have been described, but anyone +who has a fair knowledge of tools will not have much trouble in +constructing it in the home workshop if the plans are carefully +followed. Quarter-sawed oak is the best wood to use, as it is easy to +work and looks best when finished. Order the stock from the mill ready +cut to length, squared and sanded. Following is a list of the stock +needed: + + 2 front posts, 2 by 2 by 30 in. + 2 back posts, 2 by 2 by 50 in. + 1 bottom rail, 3/4 by 3 by 31 in. + 2 end rails, 3/4 by 3 by 18 in. + 1 stretcher, 3/4 by 8 by 33-1/2 in. + 2 end slats, 3/8 by 8 by 15 in. + 1 back slat, 3/8 by 8 by 15-1/2 in. + 2 back slats, 3/8 by 3 by 15-1/2 in. + 1 front drawer rail, 3/4 by 1-1/4 by 31-1/4 in. + 2 side drawer rails, 3/4 by 3 by 18-1/4 in. + 1 drawer front, 3/4 by 6 by 30 in. + 1 desk lid, 3/4 by 18 by 31-1/4 in. + 1 desk board, 3/4 by 19-1/4 by 31-1/4 in. + 2 end boards, 3/4 by 19 by 21-1/4 in. + 1 top board, 3/4 by 10 by 34 in. + 1 top back board, 3/4 by 5 by 31-1/4 in. + 1 back board, 3/4 by 30 by 22 in. + 2 drawer sides, 1/2 by 6 by 19-1/2 in., S.W. + 1 drawer end, 1/2 by 6 by 29 in., S.W. + 1 drawer bottom, 1/2 by 18 by 29 in., S.W. + 2 pieces for pigeon holes, 3/8 by 7 by 23 in., S.W. + 8 pieces for pigeon holes, 3/8 by 4 by 6-3/4 in., S.W. + +Start with the back posts, being sure they are square and of the right +length; place them side by side and lay out the mortises for the lower +rails, the desk rails and the top back boards, as shown in the +accompanying detail drawing. Lay out the front posts in the same manner. +Cut the tenons on the ends of the rails to fit the mortises in the +posts. Also cut mortises in the rails for the back and end slats. The +end rails have a mortise in them for the tenons on the ends of the foot +boards. Clamp the ends of the desk together, with the end rails in +place; then fit the side boards. Bore holes through the posts into the +side boards for dowels as shown. After the dowels are in place the holes +can be plugged. + +[Illustration: Details of Writing Desk] + +Cut and fit the top back board, the bottom rail, the back board and the +stretcher. Cut the top and desk boards at the back corners to clear the +posts. The top board is to be fastened to the side boards with blind +screws. The back board is fastened to the posts with dowels as shown. + +[Illustration: Desk Complete] + +When all the parts fit square and tight they can be glued together. The +ends of the desk should be glued up first and left to dry, then the +other parts put in place and glued. When clamping the parts together see +that they fit perfectly square and tight. While the glue is drying the +drawer can be made. The front board is made of oak, but the other parts +may be made of some soft wood. The side pieces are mortised and glued to +the front board, The end and bottom boards can be nailed together. + +The drop lid of the desk is made as shown. Two or more boards may have +to be glued together for the lid, the desk bottom and the back board. +The lid is fastened to the desk board with two hinges, and it should be +so arranged that when closed it will be even with the sides. Brackets or +chains are fastened to the inside to hold it in the proper position when +it is open. Small blocks of wood fastened to the inner edge of the side +boards will prevent it from closing too far. A lock, if desired, can be +purchased at a hardware store and fitted in place. Suitable handles for +the drawer should also be provided. + +When the desk is complete go over it with fine sandpaper and remove all +rough spots. Scrape all glue from about the joints, as the finish will +not take where there is any glue. + +The pigeonholes are made from 3/8-in. stock. They may be tacked in place +after the desk is finished. + +The finish can be any one of the many mission stains supplied by the +trade for this purpose. If the desk is well made and finished, it will +have a very neat and attractive appearance. + + + + +A TELEPHONE STAND AND STOOL + + +The stand shown in the accompanying illustration is for use with a desk +telephone. The stool when not in use, slides on two runners under the +stand. A shelf is provided for the telephone directory, paper, pencil, +etc. + +[Illustration: Stand and Stool Complete] + +[Illustration: Details of Stand and Stool] + +The joints may be made with dowels, or the mortise and tenon may be +used, as desired. If the latter is decided upon, allowance must be made +on the length of the rails for the tenons. The list given is for the +dowel-made joints. The following stock list gives the amount of material +needed which should be ordered planed and sanded. This work can be done +by hand if the builder has the time and desires to have an entire +home-made article. However, the list is given for the mill-planed +material. + +STAND + + 4 posts, 1-1/2 in. square by 29 in. + 2 rails, 7/8 by 5 by 11 in. + 1 rail, 7/8 by 1-1/2 by 13 in. + 1 rail, 7/8 by 5 by 13 in. + 2 runners, 7/8 by 1-1/2 by 14 in. + 1 top, 7/8 by 18 by 20 in. + 1 shelf, 7/8 by 12-7/8 by 13-3/4 in. + +STOOL + + 4 posts, 1-1/2 in. square by 17 in. + 4 rails, 7/8 by 4 by 6-1/2 in. + 4 rails, 7/8 by 2 by 6-1/2 in. + 1 stretcher, 7/8 by 4 by 7-1/4 in. + 1 top, 7/8 by 12-1/2 in. square. + +The exact lengths for the posts are given in the list. Should the +builder desire to square them up, allowance must be made for this when +ordering stock. + +Arrange all the pieces in the position they are to occupy in the +finished stand and stool and number all the joints. Locate the centers +and bore holes for all the dowels. Assemble the two sides of the table +first. Notch the runners and fasten them to the posts with flat-head +screws. Use hot glue on the dowel joints if possible. + +Cut the corners out of the shelf to fit the legs and assemble the frame +of the table. Use round-head screws through the rails to hold the shelf. +The top may be fastened in two ways, with screws through cleats on the +inside of the rails and under the top, or with screws slanting through +the upper part of the rails and into the top as shown. The stool, is +assembled in the same manner as the stand. + +The stand and stool should be finished to harmonize with the furniture +and woodwork of the room in which they are to be used. + + + + +HOW TO MAKE A DOWEL-CUTTING TOOL + + +Secure a piece of steel about 1/4 in. thick, 1-3/4 in. wide and 8 in. +long. Drill various sized holes through the steel as shown in Fig. 1, +leaving the edge of each hole as sharp as the drill will make them. Cut +off a block of wood the length necessary for the dowels and split it up +into pieces about the size for the particular dowel to be used. Lay the +steel on something flat, over a hole of some kind, then start one of the +pieces of wood in the proper size hole for the dowel and drive it +through with a hammer, as shown in Fig. 2. The sharp edges on the steel +will cut the dowel as smooth and round as if it were turned in a lathe. + +[Illustration: Easy Way to Make Dowels] + + + + +A MEDICINE CABINET + + +This cabinet is best made of quarter-sawed oak, as this wood is the most +easily procured and looks well when finished. Order the stock from the +mill ready cut to length, squared and sanded. The following pieces will +be needed: + + 4 posts, 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 28 in. + 4 side rails, 3/4 by 2 by 16 in. + 4 end rails, 3/4 by 2 by 7 in. + 2 door rails, 3/4 by 2 by 15 in. + 2 door rails, 3/4 by 2 by 22-3/4 in. + 1 door panel, 1/4 by 11-1/2 by 19-1/4 in. + 1 back panel, 1/4 by 15-1/2 by 23-1/4 in. + 2 end panels, 1/4 by 6-1/2 by 23-1/4 in. + 2 pieces for top and bottom, 1/2 by 6-3/4 by 15-3/4 in. + +[Illustration: Medicine Cabinet Complete] + +Square the four posts and bevel the tops as shown. + +[Illustration: Details of Medicine Cabinet] + +Cut grooves in them with a plow plane to receive the 1/4-in. panels. The +tenons on the rails are cut 1/4 in. wide and fit into the grooves in the +posts the same as the panels. The rails have grooves cut at the inside +edges for the panels. The front posts do not have grooves on the inside +but have two mortises, one at each end for the top and bottom rails. The +back has a panel fitted in the same as the ends. See that the pieces +fit together perfectly square and tight, then glue them together and +give it time to dry. + +The top and bottom boards are next put in place. The top is placed in +the center of the top rails while the bottom is put even with the lower +edge of the bottom rails, as shown in the detail drawing. The door frame +is mitered at the corners and rabbeted on the inner edge to take the +panel. A mirror can be used in place of the panel if desired. Suitable +hinges and a catch, which can be purchased at a hardware store, should +be supplied for the door. + +The shelves are of soft wood and are to be arranged to suit the maker. +Before applying a finish, go over the cabinet with fine sandpaper and +remove all the surplus glue about the joints and the rough spots, else +the finish will not take evenly. The finish can be any one of the many +different kinds supplied by the trade for this purpose. + + + + +CONTENTS + + +Arm Chair 66 + +Arm Chair, Curved Back 18 + + +Basket, Waste Paper 27 + +Bedstead, Oak 99 + +Bend Wood, How to 40 + +Bookcase 70 + +Buffet, Oak 5 + + +Cabinet, Medicine 116 + +Cedar Chest, Oak-Bound 79 + +Chair, Arm 66 + +Chair, Curved Back Arm 18 + +Chair, Rocking 14 + +Chair, Side 62 + +Chest, Oak-Bound Cedar 79 + +China Closet 47 + +China Closet, Another 94 + +Clock, Arts-Crafts Mantel 52 + +Clock, Plain Oak Hall 10 + +Couch, Oak, with Cushions 33 + + +Desk, Lady's Writing 108 + +Desk, Oak Writing 29 + +Dining Table, Extension 77 + +Dowel-Cutting Tool, How to Make 115 + +Dowel Holes, Tool for Marking 23 + +Dresser for Child's Playroom 85 + + +Electric Shade for Dining Room 37 + + +Footstool, Leather-Covered 50 + +Footstool, Oak 101 + + +Grille with Pedestals to Match 107 + +Hall Clock, Plain Oak 10 + + +Lamp, Arts and Crafts Oil 91 + +Lamp Stand 73 + +Library Set in Pyro-Carving 105 + + +Magazine Table 24 + +Mantel Clock, Arts-Crafts 52 + +Medicine Cabinet 116 + +Mortises, Tool for Making 84 + +Music Stand 55 + + +Oak Stain 9 + + +Plate Rack 21 + +Pyro-Carving, Library Set in 105 + + +Rocking Chair 14 + + +Screws, Making Hold in End Grain of Wood 58 + +Shade, Electric for Dining Room 37 + +Side Chair 62 + +Smoking Stand 43 + +Stain, Oak 9 + +Stand and Stool, Telephone 112 + +Stand, Lamp 73 + +Stand, Music 55 + +Stand, Smoking 43 + +Stool, Telephone Stand and 112 + + +Table, Extension Dining 77 + +Table--Library Set in Pyro-Carving 105 + +Table, Magazine 24 + +Telephone Stand and Stool 112 + +Tenons, Cutting with a Hand-Saw 90 + +Tool, Dowel-Cutting, How to Make 115 + +Tool for Marking Dowel Holes 23 + +Tool for Making Mortises 84 + + +Wall Case with a Mirror Door 59 + +Waste Paper Basket 27 + +Wood, How to Bend 40 + + + + * * * * * * + + + +Transcriber's Notes: + + The Table of Contents was added for the reader's convenience. + + Folio 118: "perfectly" was "perfecly". + + Folio 4 and 81 "mill-planed" was "millplaned". + + Added captions for clarity: + + Folio 27: "A WASTE PAPER BASKET". + + Folio 28: "DETAILS OF WASTE PAPER BASKET". + + Folio 58: "MAKING SCREWS HOLD IN END GRAIN". + + + +***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK MISSION FURNITURE*** + + +******* This file should be named 23991.txt or 23991.zip ******* + + +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: +https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/3/9/9/23991 + + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://www.gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: +https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + diff --git a/23991.zip b/23991.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..73abe0a --- /dev/null +++ b/23991.zip diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7143334 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #23991 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/23991) |
